Operator’s Guide

Routine Operations System Set Up and Management

• Operator Functions • System Functions
• Getting Started • Configuring Test Settings
• How Do I? • Configuring Instrument Tests (Methods)
and Flags
• Understanding the Review and Edit • Configuring Patient Locations
Window
• Viewing Samples • Configuring a Report Model
• Resolving Scheduling Issues • Setting Up Coding Systems
• Understanding the Diff Pad • Setting Up Users and Security
• Generating a Sample Report • Checking Log Files and Starting and
Stopping the Server
• Manually Entering a Result • Understanding the Watchdog Service
and Dashboard
• Manually Entering a Workorder • Scheduling Tasks
• Accessing Patient Records • Backing Up and Restoring the Software
• Accessing Physician Records • After verification, you can delete the old
cytogram directory.
• Troubleshooting • Selecting and Adding Languages
• Printing
• Customizing the Toolbars

REF 04463208 (084D0005-06, Rev. A)

© 2009 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this manual or the products it describes may be reproduced by any means or in any form
without prior consent in writing from Siemens.

ADVIA, ADVIA CentraLink, WorkCell, and LabCell are trademarks of

Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics.
Bio-Rad is a trademark of Bio-Rad Laboratories.
Watchdog is a trademark of MIPS, SA.
Progress is a trademark of the Progress Software Corporation.
The Dashboard server includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/).
Microsoft, Microsoft Access, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Dell and PowerEdge are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation.
Adobe and Reader are trademarks of Adobe.
All other trademarks and service marks used in this document are the property of their respective
owners.

The information in this manual was correct at the time of printing. However,
Siemens continues to improve products and reserves the right to change specifications, equipment,
and maintenance procedures at any time without notice. If the system is used in a manner differently
than specified by Siemens, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. See warning
and hazard statements.

2 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Contents
Contents ..............................................................................................3
Overview ...............................................................................................................11
Introduction ........................................................................................13
Operator Functions ............................................................................15
System Functions ...............................................................................16
Data Communication ..........................................................................17
ADVIA Modular Automation System .................................................19
LineMaster and Router Software .................................................19
LIS Software ...................................................................................19
Getting Started ....................................................................................20
Logging On and Off .......................................................................20
Using the Workspace ....................................................................22
Using Toolbar ................................................................................24
Using ToolTips for Quick Help .....................................................25
Working with Functions and Windows .......................................26
Scrolling to a Data Item ................................................................38
Using the ADVIA CentraLink Software ........................................39
Using the Online Version of this Guide .......................................39
Installing the Operator’s Guide on Another Computer ...................40
Operating the System ...........................................................................................41
How Do I? ............................................................................................45
Viewing Samples ................................................................................47
Understanding the Unique Sample ID and Patient ID
Environment ..................................................................................47
Following the Sample Status Through the Life Cycle ...............50

3
 Browsing All Samples ...................................................................51
Viewing the First, Previous, Next, and Last Sample ..................52
Querying Specific Samples ..........................................................54
Finding out More Information about Each Sample ....................66
Finding a Single Sample ...............................................................69
Viewing the Sample Status Overview ..........................................70
Understanding the Diff Pad ..........................................................73
Understanding Slide Requirements ............................................75
Resolving Scheduling Issues .......................................................81
Viewing the Sample Log Records ................................................84
Generating a Sample Report ........................................................86
Generating and Printing Sample Labels .....................................91
Supported Two-Way Communication ...............................................92
Communication: LIS and the ADVIA CentraLink Software .......92
Communication: ADVIA CentraLink System and the LAS ........94
Update LAS Info Upload: ADVIA CentraLink Software to LIS ...100
Understanding the Review and Edit Window ...................................102
Review and Edit Access through Sample Query Window .........102
Review and Edit Window Refresh Using the
Request Query Option ..................................................................106
Review and Edit Access through Configured Toolbar Icon .....107
Areas and Fields of the Review and Edit Window .....................112
Tests and Results Area .................................................................116
Disposition Area ...........................................................................126
Disposition Buttons Functions ....................................................132
Right-Selecting Functions ............................................................142
Viewing Test Request Information ..............................................164

4 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Understanding Quality Control .........................................................172
QC Lots ..........................................................................................173
QC Populations .............................................................................177
Evaluating QC Results ..................................................................193
Accessing the QC Results (Across controls view) Window .....194
Right-Selecting Functions ............................................................207
Omitting a QC Data Point .............................................................216
Reinstating an Omitted QC Data Point ........................................216
Auditing a QC Data Point ..............................................................217
Adding a Comment to a QC Data Point .......................................217
Uploading QC Results to the LIS .................................................217
Closing Out QC ..............................................................................219
Importing ADVIA 120/2120 QC Data ............................................220
Generating QC Reports ................................................................220
Manually Entering a Result ................................................................226
Printing a Worklist .........................................................................229
Manually Entering a Workorder .........................................................231
Creating a New Workorder ...........................................................231
Merging a New Test into an Existing Workorder ........................235
Ratio and Component Tests Ordered Manually .........................236
Updated LAS Information Uploaded to Fields on LAS Tab .......236
Accessing Patient Records ...............................................................238
Accessing Physician Records ...........................................................239
Selecting a Report Format for a Physician .................................240
System Configuration ...........................................................................................241
Configuring Test Settings ..................................................................243

5
 Adding a Test Definition ...............................................................243
Defining Test Groups ....................................................................261
Adding a Test to a Test Group .....................................................262
Editing a Test Definition ...............................................................262
Deleting a Test Definition .............................................................262
Setting a Test Unit .........................................................................263
Assigning a Unit to a Test ............................................................265
Setting a Dimension for a Unit .....................................................266
Setting Result Choices .................................................................267
Setting Test Norms .......................................................................269
Setting Delta Norms ......................................................................272
Defining Test Aspects ...................................................................276
Creating Panels for Requestables ...............................................276
Deleting a Panel .............................................................................278
Adding Tests to Requestables .....................................................279
Defining Instruments ..........................................................................280
Understanding Instrument Types ................................................286
Instrument Logs ............................................................................291
Instrument Setup Targeting .........................................................293
Instrument Retarget Function ......................................................294
Configuring Moving Average Batch Size for an Instrument .....295
Enabling Moving Average for a Method ......................................295
Setting up QC Populations for Moving Average Data ...............295
Creating or Modifying Instrument Groups .......................................298
Configuring Instrument Tests (Methods) and Flags .......................300
Setting Instrument Flags ..............................................................300

6 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Setting Instrument Tests (Methods) ............................................302
Configuring Westgard Rules ........................................................315
Method Setup Targeting Function ...............................................319
Setting Up Coding Systems ...............................................................320
Using Coding Systems .................................................................320
Setting Up a Test Code .................................................................320
Setting up a Sample Type Code ...................................................321
Setting Up a Container Type Code ..............................................322
Setting Up a Species Code ...........................................................323
Defining Sample Sources .............................................................324
Setting Up a Sample Source Code ..............................................325
Configuring Patient Locations ..........................................................327
Configuring a Report Model ..............................................................328
Defining Print Commands ..................................................................331
System Management ............................................................................................333
Setting Up Users and Security ..........................................................335
Adding New Users .........................................................................335
Assigning Privileges .....................................................................342
Adding Functions to a Privilege ..................................................343
Adding Users to a Privilege ..........................................................345
Protecting Table and Field Data ...................................................347
Auditing Database Tables ..................................................................349
Viewing Audit Logs .......................................................................352
Checking Log Files and Starting and Stopping the Server ............358
Using Progress Explorer ..............................................................359
Manually Stopping the Database .................................................359

7
 Manually Starting the Database ...................................................360
Understanding the Watchdog Service and Dashboard ...................361
Watchdog Service .........................................................................361
Watchdog Dashboard ..................................................................362
Configuring the Watchdog Service and Dashboard ........................368
Starting Watchdog Service Independent of Other Services .....368
Configuring Watchdog Dashboard ..............................................371
Checking Database Storage ..............................................................375
Purging Data from the Database ..................................................377
Scheduling Tasks ...............................................................................378
Backing Up and Restoring the Software ..........................................380
Backing Up the Databases ...........................................................380
Performing a Backup ....................................................................382
Compatibility of Backup Tapes ....................................................383
Restoring the Databases from a Tape Backup ...........................384
Restoring the Databases from a Disk Backup ............................387
Selecting and Adding Languages .....................................................391
Understanding User Interface Languages ..................................391
Changing User-Defined Languages ............................................391
Defining Languages for Users .....................................................393
Setting the Language for Add-on Programs ...............................393
Printing ................................................................................................395
Customizing Reports ....................................................................398
Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................399
Troubleshooting .................................................................................402
Error Messages .............................................................................402

8 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Troubleshooting and Tips ............................................................403
Index ...............................................................................................................407

9
10 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide
 Overview

Section 1:Overview
Introduction ........................................................................................13
Operator Functions ............................................................................15
System Functions ...............................................................................16
Data Communication ..........................................................................17
ADVIA Modular Automation System .................................................19
LineMaster and Router Software .................................................19
LIS Software ...................................................................................19
Getting Started ....................................................................................20
Logging On and Off .......................................................................20
Using the Workspace ....................................................................22
Using Toolbar ................................................................................24
Using ToolTips for Quick Help .....................................................25
Working with Functions and Windows .......................................26
Scrolling to a Data Item ................................................................38
Using the ADVIA CentraLink Software ........................................39
Using the Online Version of this Guide .......................................39
Installing the Operator’s Guide on Another Computer ...................40

11
12 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide
Introduction
This Operator’s Guide is applicable to ADVIA CentraLink® System Software 13.0
and higher.
The ADVIA CentraLink system software is your network solution provider and
multi-system data manager for the instruments and laboratory automation
systems (LAS) in your lab.
The ADVIA CentraLink software consolidates data from all connected
instruments so that an operator can review and edit patient and quality control
results from a single location.

The ADVIA CentraLink system is configurable to have 1 or 2 separate

communication channels with a single lab information system (LIS) to enable

13
 concurrent uploading data to and downloading data from the LIS. With this
configuration, the communication channels consist of one channel for
downloading test orders from the LIS and another for uploading results from the
ADVIA CentraLink software. The 2 separate communication channels ensure
continuous communication flow of information from the LIS to the
ADVIA CentraLink software and from the ADVIA CentraLink software to the LIS.
For LIS that do not support more than one channel for communication to the
same host, the upload and download communication can be achieved using a
single connection.
The ADVIA CentraLink software supports the ability to configure either one or two
lab automation systems.
Upon receipt of workorder download from the LIS, the ADVIA CentraLink
software automatically downloads all received workorders to the LAS. Upon
sample checkin to the LAS and during the physical routing of samples to the
analyzers, Sample Managers, and Cold Storage for archival of samples, LAS
status update messages are uploaded from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink
software to provide accessioning and sample location information. The
ADVIA CentraLink software also provides the ability to manually query the LAS
for sample location information.
When 2 lab automation systems are configured, the ADVIA CentraLink software
downloads all workorders and queries to both lab automation systems. If one lab
automation system is temporarily not accepting orders, the ADVIA CentraLink
software sends previously unsent orders to the LAS after the connection is
reestablished with the associated lab automation system. Accordingly, the
ADVIA CentraLink software receives updates from both lab automation systems
upon a LAS status update.
The ADVIA CentraLink software can support a maximum of 32 connections.
These connections can include a maximum of 32 instrument connections or 30
instrument connections and 2 lab automation system connections. The total
number of combined instrument and LAS connections cannot exceed 32.
The ADVIA CentraLink software supports a maximum of 15 client computers or
workstations, of which a maximum of four clients may be remote clients.

14 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Operator Functions
An ADVIA CentraLink operator is a person who performs routine operations.
Routine operations include the following tasks:
• Reviewing data for multiple instruments from any ADVIA CentraLink system
workstation
• Managing automated data review and result release of patient test samples.
• Customizing laboratory-specific criteria for flagging, delta check, and auto-
reflex and repeat testing
• Viewing ADVIA® hematology system cytograms and histograms
• Performing manual result entry
• Managing Quality Control (QC)
• Generating QC reports

15
System Functions
A system manager is the person who configures and monitors ADVIA CentraLink
software for the operators who perform routine operations.
The system manager uses the ADVIA CentraLink software to do the following
tasks:
• Verify that initial settings are properly configured for instruments, tests,
patients, physicians, QCs, and related data
• Add new users
• Set up security for all users
• Customize ADVIA CentraLink software toolbars
• Monitor communication with the LIS, lab automation system (LAS), and
instruments
• Monitor instrument and QC status
• Back up and restore the system

16 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Data Communication
The ADVIA CentraLink software displays a variety of data, such as patient
results, workorders, QC results, patients, and physicians. Some information
comes from the LIS, LAS, and from the instruments performing tests.
The following illustration depicts the flow through which ADVIA CentraLink
software receives and sends data.

Data Collection and Transfer Points Workflow Paths

1 LIS A Workorders from LIS
2 ADVIA CentraLink system B Workorders from the
ADVIA CentraLink system

17
 Data Collection and Transfer Points Workflow Paths
G Sample location information from the
LAS
3 Lab automation system (LAS) C Tube Transfer Communication
4 Instruments D Sample Query Communication
E Sample Results
F Results from the ADVIA CentraLink
system to the LIS
The ADVIA CentraLink software receives downloaded workorders from the LIS
and downloads them to the LAS. The instrument queries the ADVIA CentraLink
software for test selectivity for specific bar-coded sample IDs. When the tests are
completed for a sample, the instrument sends the results to the
ADVIA CentraLink software. Normal results can be automatically validated and
sent to the LIS.

18 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

ADVIA Modular Automation System
If you are using ADVIA CentraLink software within an ADVIA® LabCell® or
ADVIA WorkCell™ CDX system, your lab can have several different workstations
each running different applications. Operators can perform daily operations using
other applications within the ADVIA automation system.

LineMaster and Router Software

Use the LineMaster software or the Router software to accomplish the following
tasks:
• Identify and resolve samples in question
• Correct routing status
• Manage sample tray input and output
- Direct sort trays to offline laboratories to complete processing
- Determine where sample trays are stored after processing
• Query for the current location and processing status of samples
• For pick list purposes, locate samples that were moved to storage
- Print tray contents
• Handle errors and troubleshooting
• Manage which components are currently online and offline
• Manage LIS-ADVIA CentraLink software to automation computer status

LIS Software
Use the LIS software to manage the following items:
• Order entry
• Dilutions ordered at the LIS
• Long term result storage
• Reporting

19
Getting Started
In this section, you learn about the following features and functions:
• Log on to the ADVIA CentraLink software
• Work with the ADVIA CentraLink system workspace
• Use the toolbar to access the data you need
• Use ToolTips to help you understand the meaning of a data field
• Execute a command using the menus or right mouse button
• Use the online version of this guide

Logging On and Off

To log on to the ADVIA CentraLink software, you must have a user name and
password and enter them in the fields of the Login window. See your
ADVIA CentraLink system administrator to obtain a user ID.
To launch the ADVIA CentraLink application, double-select the
ADVIA CentraLink system icon on the desktop. The Login window displays.

20 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

If at a given workstation the ADVIA CentraLink software is already running, you
can check who is currently logged onto that workstation by looking at the user
name in the status bar, which is located at the bottom of the screen.

1 Start menu
2 Name of current user

To log off the system:

1. On the menu bar, select Start > Exit.

21
 Using the Workspace
The ADVIA CentraLink system workspace consists of different areas.

1 Menu Bar. Displays the ADVIA CentraLink software menus. Some menu items
vary depending on the windows open in the workspace. For example, the
Record menu is not active until a window, such as the Samples window, is open.
The items on the Edit menu (Cut, Copy, Paste) are active for an open window.

22 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

2 Editing toolbar. Icons for common tasks (Open, Save, Find Data) apply to an
open window.
The Resize active window icon is one of the icons on the Editing toolbar and
enables you to resize windows and browsers within the ADVIA CentraLink
application. For example, you can decrease the overall frame size of the Review
and Edit window or the individual browser columns contained within the Review
and Edit window. You can resize windows to view multiple windows
simultaneously within the ADVIA CentraLink software; for example, the Review
and Edit and QC Results (Across controls view) windows.
Once specified, the resized windows maintain the new size specifications
between ADVIA CentraLink sessions for that user. Double-selecting the frame
title bar restores the default window size.
Refer to Resizing Windows on the Workspace‚ page 23.
3 Function toolbar. Icons for commonly used functions. Each function opens a
window. The first group of functions on the toolbar are also on the Start >
Routine menu.
4 Workspace. Area where open windows are displayed. You can work on multiple
open windows simultaneously with other users on other workstations.
5 Status bar. Displays messages, workstation name, and logged in user.

Resizing Windows on the Workspace

System managers have the ability to resize windows within the
ADVIA CentraLink software.
To resize a window on the workspace, do the following:
1. Select the title bar of the window.
2. Select the Resize active window icon.
The title of the window changes and a boarder displays. For window resizing,
drag the black border box to the required size. For column resizing, select the
column header border and drag to the required size.
3. To save the changes after you resize the window, select the Resize active
window icon.

23
 NOTE:You can restore the default window size by double-selecting the title
bar of the window when the resize setting is active.

Using Toolbar
When the ADVIA CentraLink software is initiated, only the menus and toolbars
are displayed. To start your work, which can include reviewing and editing results
or checking QC, you can select a toolbar icon.
The toolbar contains the most frequently used functions. By hovering over the
toolbar, the name of each operation displays. Each of the toolbar functions are
described later in this guide.

1 Instrument
2 Tests
3 Order Entry
4 Patients
5 Physicians
6 Samples
7 Review and Edit
8 Results Entry Grid
9 QC
10 System Manager Functions

24 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Using ToolTips for Quick Help
The ADVIA CentraLink software has ToolTips for quick help on any toolbar
button, field, or window button.
To find out a brief description of an item, rest your mouse pointer over it to
activate a ToolTip.

25
 Working with Functions and Windows
The ADVIA CentraLink software offers several ways for you to do your work,
including menus, context menus, selection from the ? symbol, and keyboard
shortcuts.

Using Menus
The menus on the top of the ADVIA CentraLink system window contain functions
that you can use as an alternative to using the toolbar.
The main functions for routine operations can be initiated as follows:
1. On the menu bar, select Start > Routine menu.

26 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

A menu item with a right-arrow indicator contains submenus.
NOTE: After selecting a specific menu option, you might have to select Related
prior to seeing the display of your menu choice.
After you select a menu item or toolbar icon, the workspace displays a window
appropriate for the function you selected.

Using Browsers and Editors

The ADVIA CentraLink software contains two types of windows:
• Browser windows display information in a list format. You cannot enter data to
Browser windows.
• Editor windows contain fields, that allow you to enter data. You submit this
information by selecting OK.
NOTE: Greyed fields on Editor windows indicate that these fields are not
enabled; that is, you cannot enter data to these greyed fields.
The main difference between the two window types is that browsers display lists
to which you cannot directly add items. You add items to a browser by accessing
and inputting data to its corresponding editor. An editor enables you to enter and
submit data. Shortcut keys are associated with different types of windows. For
more information, see Using Keyboard Shortcuts‚ page 37.

27
 Browser Window
A browser allows you to view data.

Selecting Records within a Browser Window

Highlighting a record alone is not sufficient to select the record. When you
successfully select a record, the greater than symbol, (>), populates the left-most
column of the selected record.
To select or deselect an individual record in a browser window, you must navigate
to the record, highlight the record with your cursor, and select the record by
pressing Space Bar.
To select one record or multiple records in a browser window, do one of the
following:
• Navigate to each record individually, highlight the record with your cursor, and
select the record by pressing Space Bar.
• At the Editing toolbar, select the Select All icon.

28 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• At the Menu bar, select Record > First occurrence.
Selects the first record in the list to the highlighted record.
• At the Menu bar, select Record > Current to last.
Selects the current highlighted record in the list to the last record.
To deselect multiple records in a browser window, do one of the following:
• Navigate to each record individually, highlight the record with your cursor, and
deselect the record by pressing Space Bar.
• At the Editing toolbar, select the Deselect All icon.
Within a generic Browser window, you can update multiple records at the same
time by selecting the appropriate records and executing a given command or
function. Each of the selected records is updated.
If you attempt to execute a command or function on multiple selected records in a
generic Browser window and another row of the browser is highlighted, but not
selected, a message displays warning that the current record is not selected. If
you select Yes to continue, the selected records are updated; the highlighted
record is not updated.
This warning message is not displayed if you attempt to execute a multirecord set
command or function at the Review and Edit window or at the QC Across
Controls View window.

29
 Editor Window
An editor allows you to enter data. To submit the data, select OK.

Browser and Editor Windows: Using Double-Select and Context Menus

After opening a window, you can double-select in a field or right-select a selected
entry to gain access to additional information. The right-select menu is called the
context menu.
• For additional information, double-select an item in a window. In the Samples
window, for example, you can select a sample and double-select. The Order
Entry window displays.
• To take additional action on an item, select the item and right-select. Select a
function from the right-select menu.

30 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Right-select a selected item to display the context menu.
A popup menu that lists functions specifically available to the record displays.
Depending on the target record, the context popup menu dynamically adjusts
itself, disabling options that are not applicable to the single target record.
Double-select a selected item to view details about it.

NOTE: Functions on the right-select menu also display on the main

ADVIA CentraLink system context menu. A different menu displays in place of
the Context menu depending on the window that is open in the workspace. If a
window is not open, the Context menu is empty.

31
 Using the ? Symbol Placeholder
On many ADVIA CentraLink system windows, a ? symbol displays.
The ? symbol can have different meanings depending on the field in which it
displays.
NOTE: Before making changes to a field that contains the ? symbol, ensure that
you fully understand the acceptable values.
To use the ? symbol placeholder, perform the following steps:
1. Rest your mouse on a field that contains the ? symbol.
2. If your cursor changes to a hand shape, double-select the ? symbol.
Another window opens with a list of acceptable data for the field.

32 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

3. If your cursor changes to an I-beam shape, there is no list of data from which
to select.
You can type into the field. See the I-beam cursor in the Sample ID field of the
Order Entry window.

If the field is not required, the ? symbol is a default value, and you do not
have to change it. In some cases, such as search queries, the ? symbol is an
indication that the system does not use the field to filter results. Leaving the ?
symbol returns items regardless of what they contain for the field.

33
 NOTE: In some cases, the ? symbol is necessary if no entry is made in a field.
Removing the ? symbol and leaving the field blank can cause system errors.
For example, if your cursor changes to a hand shape when the mouse rests in
the Method test field, you can double-select the ? symbol to view a selection list.

34 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Upon double selecting in the Method test field, the Tests browser window
displays.

Upon selecting the appropriate test and double selecting, the QC Population
editor window redisplays.

35
 The Method test field is populated with the selected test, RBC.

36 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are available in the software.
Window Keyboard Keys to Press Description of Action
Any F10 Places active keyboard control on the
Start selection of the main menu
F4 Displays the right-select menu
F2 Submit and proceed
ESC Cancel and proceed
Browser INSERT Call editor for create
F5 Refresh current query
F6 Call editor for update
CTRL + F Call Find dialog
<Space> Toggle selection
ENTER, <double-select> In lookup mode: return record, otherwise
call editor for update
Editor TAB Advance to next field or button
SHIFT + TAB Backup to previous field or button
F7 Go to the first empty field
Field SHIFT + <Arrow> Select
CTRL + C Copy selection
CTRL + X Cut selection
CTRL + V Paste selection
Refnce. CTRL + F Call browser for lookup
F6 Zoom (call Editor)
<Up arrow> Previous alternative
<Down arrow> Next alternative
Fill-in CTRL+ E Deletes the text after your cursor

37
 Window Keyboard Keys to Press Description of Action
CTRL+ R Recall

Scrolling to a Data Item

If you know the name or ID of a sample, patient, physician, or other data item,
you can display the information by typing it into a field on the appropriate window
rather than scrolling through a long list.
1. Open the appropriate window.
For example, select Patients on the toolbar. The Patients browser window
displays.
2. Select in the left-most field.
Select in Last Name on the Patients browser window. Do not select the entry.
3. Type the data item that you want to access.
Type Smith to access a patient named Smith. As you type, the browser
scrolls to the first match.

38 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Using the ADVIA CentraLink Software
• If you initiate a database query and the system remains unresponsive, you
can cancel the query by pressing CTRL+BREAK if necessary. Pressing
CTRL+BREAK, however, could stop the Progress database and close the
ADVIA CentraLink software.
To shorten query time and to prevent the likelihood of an unresponsive
system, restrict the search parameters by providing the known search criteria
when making queries.
• If you make a database query that takes a long time, and you want to cancel
it, just press CTRL+BREAK. This action closes query. At other times, this
action closes the ADVIA CentraLink software, and you can log on again and
start over.
• If you open several windows, use the Active Window to Foreground and
Active Window to Background icons on the toolbar to refocus the
appropriate window.
• Use the Find function (the Binocular icon on the toolbar) to find a specific
test, sample type or other data. You can enter only alphabetical text in the
Find window; numbers are not accepted.
• For the quickest help, refer to How Do I?‚ page 45 of this guide.

Using the Online Version of this Guide

If you are using the online version of this Operator’s Guide, you can use the
following features:
• Access this guide by selecting Help from the ADVIA CentraLink system help
menu. Adobe Reader opens with the ADVIA CentraLink system operator
guide displayed.
• The Table of Contents displays in the left pane on the window.
• Access the full text search feature by selecting the Binocular icon.

39
Installing the Operator’s Guide on Another Computer
You may need to install the ADVIA CentraLink system Operator’s Guide on a
computer that is not running the ADVIA CentraLink software. The installation
procedure installs the following items:
• Adobe Reader 9.0
• ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide
To install the Operator’s Guide:
1. Close all Windows programs before beginning the installation.
2. Insert the ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide CD in the CD drive.
The installation starts automatically.
3. On the Welcome window, select Next.
4. Leave both options selected on the Choose options window and select Next.
A Choose Destination Location window displays with the following text:
“WARNING: CentraLink Server software has not been installed on this
computer.
5. If you wish to continue installing the ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide, you
must select a destination folder using Browse.
6. If you do not want to continue the installation, select Cancel.
Select Next to agree to the default destination folder: C:\CentraLink\Doc.
7. Select Yes if asked to create the C:\CentraLink\Doc folder.
The Adobe Reader 9.0 install runs. When the installation is complete, the
CentraLink Install window displays. The Adobe License Agreement and the
Software License Agreement displays.
8. Select Accept.
The ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide installation runs. After the
Operator’s Guide is installed, a Setup Complete window displays a message
to reboot to complete setup. I want to restart my computer now is selected
by default.
9. Select Finish to restart the computer and complete the installation.

40 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Operating the System

Section 2:Operating the System

How Do I? ............................................................................................45
Viewing Samples ................................................................................47
Understanding the Unique Sample ID and Patient ID
Environment ..................................................................................47
Following the Sample Status Through the Life Cycle ...............50
Browsing All Samples ...................................................................51
Viewing the First, Previous, Next, and Last Sample ..................52
Querying Specific Samples ..........................................................54
Finding out More Information about Each Sample ....................66
Finding a Single Sample ...............................................................69
Viewing the Sample Status Overview ..........................................70
Understanding the Diff Pad ..........................................................73
Understanding Slide Requirements ............................................75
Resolving Scheduling Issues .......................................................81
Viewing the Sample Log Records ................................................84
Generating a Sample Report ........................................................86
Generating and Printing Sample Labels .....................................91
Supported Two-Way Communication ...............................................92
Communication: LIS and the ADVIA CentraLink Software .......92
Communication: ADVIA CentraLink System and the LAS ........94
Update LAS Info Upload: ADVIA CentraLink Software to LIS ...100
Understanding the Review and Edit Window ...................................102
Review and Edit Access through Sample Query Window .........102
Review and Edit Window Refresh Using the
Request Query Option ..................................................................106

41
 Review and Edit Access through Configured Toolbar Icon .....107
Areas and Fields of the Review and Edit Window .....................112
Tests and Results Area .................................................................116
Disposition Area ...........................................................................126
Disposition Buttons Functions ....................................................132
Right-Selecting Functions ............................................................142
Viewing Test Request Information ..............................................164
Understanding Quality Control .........................................................172
QC Lots ..........................................................................................173
QC Populations .............................................................................177
Evaluating QC Results ..................................................................193
Accessing the QC Results (Across controls view) Window .....194
Right-Selecting Functions ............................................................207
Omitting a QC Data Point .............................................................216
Reinstating an Omitted QC Data Point ........................................216
Auditing a QC Data Point ..............................................................217
Adding a Comment to a QC Data Point .......................................217
Uploading QC Results to the LIS .................................................217
Closing Out QC ..............................................................................219
Importing ADVIA 120/2120 QC Data ............................................220
Generating QC Reports ................................................................220
Manually Entering a Result ................................................................226
Printing a Worklist .........................................................................229
Manually Entering a Workorder .........................................................231
Creating a New Workorder ...........................................................231
Merging a New Test into an Existing Workorder ........................235

42 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Operating the System

Ratio and Component Tests Ordered Manually .........................236

Updated LAS Information Uploaded to Fields on LAS Tab .......236
Accessing Patient Records ...............................................................238
Accessing Physician Records ...........................................................239
Selecting a Report Format for a Physician .................................240

43
44 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide
How Do I?
For a quick answer, go to the page for a specific task:

Task Go to
Review and Edit
Review sample results page 47
Review results for specific samples page 54
Validate and Invalidate results page 132
Rerun a test page 134
Edit a result page 152
Print a sample report page 86
Append a comment to a result page 152
Interpret result severities page 125
Display result flag details page 137
Revert a result page 135
Omit a test page 149
QC Results
Review QC results page 193
Interpret QC from results or Levey-Jennings plots page 184
Omit a QC data point page 216
Reinstate a QC data point page 216
Audit a QC data point page 217
Reset QC severity page 205

45
 Task Go to
Close out QC page 219
Print QC results page 220
Add a new QC lot page 173
Miscellaneous
Create a workorder page 231
Use Diff Pad page 73
Manually enter results and send to the LIS page 226
Merge a workorder with unsolicited results from an instrument page 235

46 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Viewing Samples
Each sample consists of one or more test requests. The status of a sample is the
same as the lowest status of a test request within the sample. For example, if a
sample has 10 tests and one test result has a status of Pending, the sample
status is Pending.

Understanding the Unique Sample ID and Patient ID

Environment
The ADVIA CentraLink system is designed to operate with unique sample IDs
and unique patient IDS. The LIS must support unique sample and patient IDs.
If sample IDs must be reused, ensure that the sample IDs that are candidates for
reuse are deleted from the sample database before they are reused.

Deleting Existing Sample IDs before Sample ID Reuse

The first step in ensuring that sample IDs are deleted from the database before
reuse is to execute the Purge function.

Purge Function
Purging the sample database removes all samples from the database with status
Uploaded, Omitted, and Unknown; that is, the purge function deletes those
samples that do not have Pending, Rerun, Scheduled, or Review status test
requests. Refer to Purging Sample and Worklist Data from the Database‚
page 72.
Those samples with status Pending, Rerun, Scheduled, and Review are not
purged from the database upon executing the Purge function. These samples
have active workorders and outstanding test requests within the
ADVIA CentraLink system and as such, the sample IDs that identify them are not
typically candidates for reuse. It is important to note, therefore, that if they were
reused without first being deleted from the system, the results for the new
physical sample would merge with the results of the original, different physical
sample.
If your lab requires the reuse of sample IDs that are associated with samples in
Pending, Rerun, Scheduled, and Review status, however, you must take the

47
 additional step of executing an Omit command to ensure that these sample IDs
are deleted from the database.

Omit Command
The Omit command changes the status of samples that exceed the sample
retention time period requirements of your lab to Omitted.
Your local technical support provider can configure the Omit command to change
the status of samples that existed in the database for a user-specified number of
days from Pending, Rerun, Scheduled, and Review to Omitted.
Once configured, the Omit command can be scheduled to run as a task as per
your lab’s requirements. The next time the Purge function is initiated after the
Omit command is executed, the sample IDs associated with these samples in
status Omitted are deleted from the database along with the sample IDs
associated with other samples in status Uploaded, Omitted, and Unknown.

Retaining Unique Patient IDs

Although samples with status Uploaded, Omitted, and Unknown are deleted from
the database upon executing the Purge function, the patient information
associated with these samples is not deleted from the database. Patient
information and the patient IDs that identify this patient information exist in the
database after the samples to which they were associated are deleted. As such,
patient IDs should never be reused.
CAUTION: The ADVIA CentraLink software does not support the automatic
purge of patient information when the samples, to which the patient IDs are
associated, are purged from the sample database. Do not reuse patient IDs.
The ADVIA CentraLink software is designed to operate with unique Patient IDs.
As the LIS is considered the master system from which the most current data
originates, the ADVIA CentraLink software always accepts updates to patient
records from the LIS.
As such, every patient demographic update that is downloaded from the LIS to
the ADVIA CentraLink software must be identified by a unique patient ID that
references the same physical patient.
If a patient ID were reused to reference another physical patient, patient
demographic updates downloaded from the LIS would overwrite the original
patient details associated with this patient ID. Under this circumstance, an

48 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

erroneous mix of new patient details that pertain to another physical patient
would coexist in the same record of the ADVIA CentraLink database with
unrelated patient details that pertain to the original physical patient. Upon
download from the LIS, the existing patient data in the ADVIA CentraLink
database would be overwritten with non-related patient demographic data that
pertains to another physical patient.
WARNING: Do not reuse patient IDs.
Upon download, the LIS should always send valid, populated values within the
following fields: Patient Age, Patient Gender, and Patient Name.
The LIS must be capable of assigning different sample IDs to samples of different
sample types for the same patient and must be capable of sending these sample
IDs to the ADVIA CentraLink system as different workorders.
The LIS must also be capable of separating different sample types into different
workorders. Most often, the LIS specifies the sample type in the workorder. If the
sample type is not included in the workorder, the ADVIA CentraLink system
applies the sample type for the first test in the workorder to the entire workorder.

Understanding the Sample Reuse Period

As an additional safeguard to ensure the unique sample ID environment, the
ADVIA CentraLink software does not accept results from an instrument for a
given sample ID after a configurable time period, known as the sample reuse
period. Refer to Configurable Sample Reuse Period‚ page 142.
Within the ADVIA CentraLink software, the sample reuse period parameter is
defined as the number of days in which you would retain a sample in your lab
after the first sample result is generated. This sample reuse period parameter is
used in a calculation to determine whether sample results from an instrument are
received within the sample reuse period and whether they are accepted and
saved.
This definition ensures that even when the sample ID exists in the system, the
ADVIA CentraLink software does not accept results from the instrument for this
sample ID after the sample reuse period.
When sample results received from an instrument exceed the sample reuse
period, the results are not saved and the sample ID associated with this sample
is eligible for reuse.

49
 If your lab requirements dictate that you reuse a sample ID that references a
sample for which results exceeded the sample reuse period, upload the sample
results to the LIS. This upload changes the sample status to Uploaded.
The next time the Purge function is initiated, the sample ID associated with this
sample in status Uploaded is deleted from the database along with the sample
IDs associated with other samples in status Uploaded, Omitted, and Unknown.
After the sample reuse period has elapsed and the sample ID is purged from the
system, the same sample ID can be reused in the ADVIA CentraLink software as
a unique sample ID.

Summary of the Unique Sample ID and Patient ID Environment

To ensure the proper maintenance of the unique sample ID and patient ID
environment, define a relevant sample reuse period and contact your local
technical support provider to configure and schedule regular Purge and Omit
tasks. In so doing, you delete sample IDs from the database, make them
available for subsequent reuse, and maintain the overall integrity of the database.

Following the Sample Status Through the Life Cycle

The status of a sample is the same as the lowest status of a test within the
sample. To better understand samples, a hypothetical sample life cycle can be
considered. Let’s assume for this example that the sample must be transported
to two instruments.
The life cycle of a typical sample is as follows:
• Upon receiving an order from the LIS, all requests in the sample record are
created in status Pending. As such, the sample status is set to Pending.
• The sample is transported to its first target instrument. The instrument queries
the ADVIA CentraLink system and receives part of the original workorder in
return. Some requests are promoted to status Scheduled. The sample status
remains in status Pending.
• The first instrument uploads results. The scheduled requests are promoted to
status Review. The sample status remains in status Pending.
• Some requests are automatically validated based on low severity
assignments. These requests are promoted to status Validated. The sample
status remains in status Pending.

50 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• The sample is transported to its second and final target instrument. Upon
query to the ADVIA CentraLink system from the instrument, all requests still
in status Pending are promoted to status Scheduled. At this point, when all
requests are scheduled, the sample status is promoted to status Scheduled.
• The second instrument uploads results. Upon result upload, the sample
status is in status Review.
• During a Review and Edit session, all requests still in Review status can be
validated and then uploaded to the LIS. Once all requests are validated and
uploaded, the sample status is promoted to Uploaded.

Browsing All Samples

You can see a list of all samples in the database by sample ID, patient ID,
collection date/time and physician ID.
Access the Samples browser window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start >Routine > Samples > Browse.
You can also select the Samples icon on the toolbar menu and then select
OK on the Sample query window.

51
 NOTE: If the sample list is very large, the display could take a long time. If it takes
too long to display a sample list, press CTRL+BREAK to cancel the query.

Viewing the First, Previous, Next, and Last Sample

To move through the selected set of samples and display the corresponding
Review and Edit window for each sample, select the following toolbar buttons:
Name Description
First Review and Edit: Displays the first sample record.
Browser: Positions the cursor on the first sample
and highlights it.

52 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Name Description
Previous Review and Edit: Displays the previous sample
record.
NOTE: When the Auto-skip feature is enabled,
samples records that would otherwise appear with
no test requests on the Review and Edit window due
to restrictions set by specifying a filter view are
skipped when you select the Next page/Previous
page or Next record/Previous record button icons of
the editing toolbar. For details, refer to Auto
Skipping Sample Records that Do Not Match Test
Request Criteria‚ page 141.
Browser: Positions the cursor on the previous
sample and highlights it.
Next Review and Edit: Displays the next sample record.
NOTE: When the Auto-skip feature is enabled,
sample records that would otherwise appear with no
test requests on the Review and Edit window due to
restrictions set by specifying a filter view are skipped
when you select the Next page/Previous page or
Next record/Previous record button icons of the
editing toolbar. For details, refer to Auto Skipping
Sample Records that Do Not Match Test Request
Criteria‚ page 141.
Browser: Positions the cursor on the next sample
and highlights it.
Last Review and Edit: Displays the last sample record.
Browser: Positions the cursor on the last sample
and highlights it.

53
 Querying Specific Samples
The ADVIA CentraLink system database may contain thousands of samples.
Most of the time you do not want to see all samples, but rather a subset of
samples based on specified criteria.
You can specify criteria on the Sample Query window to restrict the samples that
are accessed. The more selection criteria specified, the smaller the resulting
record set. Leaving a ? symbol in a field indicates that the field is not used to filter
the record set the query returns.
You have the option of viewing your query results in standard data view or
alternate data view:
• Selected samples with standard data view. The listed data includes sample
ID, priority, patient ID, collection date/time, physician ID, and status.
• Selected samples with alternate data view. The listed data includes Sample
ID, Priority, Patient ID and name, Status, LAS seq no, LAS general area, LAS
specific area, LAS tray id, LAS tray position, and LAS time.
Regardless of the view in which you want to see your sample result set, you can
enter search criteria by setting one or more of the fields on the Basic and
Advanced tabs of the Sample Query window.

54 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Access the Sample query editor window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Samples > Query.
The Sample query window displays.

55
 Basic Tab of Sample Query Window
Field Description
Sample ID When Sample ID is specified, only one single sample
can be returned by the query.
The ADVIA CentraLink software supports Sample IDs
with a maximum of 16 characters.
NOTE: Use caution when using sample ID values
consisting of 16 uppercase alpha characters. While the
sample ID is accepted by the ADVIA CentraLink
software, the 15th and 16th, uppercase, alpha
characters display as if they were truncated in the
ADVIA CentraLink software. Upon subsequent retrieval
of the sample ID at the Sample browser window, the
16th character does not display, and at the Review and
Edit window, both the 15th and 16th characters do not
display. For example, if you enter a sample ID value of
“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP," the sample ID value
"ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO" would display at the Sample
browser window and the sample ID value
"ABCDEFGHIJKLMN" would display at the Review and
Edit window.
You can enlarge the size of the Sample browser
window or Review and Edit window to increase the
Sample ID field and display the full Sample ID value.
NOTE: For information on resizing windows in the
ADVIA CentraLink software, refer to Using the
Workspace‚ page 22.
NOTE: The ADVIA CentraLink system is designed to
operate in a unique environment. All sample IDs must
be unique.

56 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
At least one test in By selecting this checkbox, you have the ability to
Status select samples with at least one test in a particular
status. For example in selecting this checkbox and
selecting REV in the Minimal Status field, all samples
with at least one test in REV status are returned to the
Sample browser window.
If you do not select this checkbox, only samples having
a sample status that corresponds to the search criteria
in the Minimal status and Maximal status fields are
returned.

57
 Field Description
Minimal status and Restricts the eligible sample statuses to a from and to
Maximal status range.
All samples with a status between the Minimal status,
which is the “from” status value, and Maximal status,
which is the “to” status value, are returned. For example
if PND and REV are selected in the Minimal status and
Maximal status range fields respectively, all samples
with the following statuses are returned: PND, SCH,
RRN, REV.
When the At least one test in Status field is selected
and the Minimal status and Maximal status fields are
populated, then all samples with at least one test in the
status range are returned to the Sample browser
window.
When you enter a Minimal status value, the Maximal
status field is automatically assigned the same status
value.
When you enter a Maximal status value, the Minimal
status value is not affected.
As a convenience, the Maximal status field value
automatically changes to Validated (VAL), when any
restrictions are provided on the following: Instrument or
Instrument Group; Test or Test Group; Aspiration From
and To dates. You can modify this automatically
populated value of VAL to any other status value
including the ? symbol.
You are not required to enter a Maximal status value
when the At least on test in Status checkbox is
selected.

58 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Minimal status and NOTE: Exercise caution when entering a Maximal
Maximal status status value. You could inadvertently enter a Maximal
(cont’d) status value that is less than the Minimal status value.
Under these conditions, the query returns 0 samples.
As no error message displays under these
circumstances, recheck the query parameters that you
selected when queries return no samples.
If you do not want to specify a status, leave the ?
symbol displayed in both fields.
Minimal priority Sets the minimum priority that a sample must have to
display. The options include the following priorities:
• Routine
• Stat
• ASAP
Test group Restricts the result set to samples containing at least
one request for a test of the specified test group.
When a value is entered into the Test group field, the
Test field is disabled.
Test Restricts the result set to samples containing at least
one request for the specified test.
When a value is entered into the Test field, the Test
group field is disabled.
Collected from and to Restricts the result set to those collected within the
specified date-time interval. The first field of each pair is
the date. Double-select to display and select from a
calendar. The second field is the time in hours and
minutes.
Species Restricts the result set to a species.
Patient identifier Restricts the result set to patient ID.

59
 Field Description
Patient last name Restricts the result set to patient last name.
Type Restricts the result set to those of a specified sample
type.
Instrument group Restricts the result set to those containing at least one
request referencing the specified instrument group.
Instrument Restricts the result set to those having at least one
request for the selected instrument.
When searching for test requests or results when a
normal instrument is specified, the query searches for
the instrument that equals the normal instrument.
When searching for test requests or results when a
concentrator is specified, the query searches for the
instrument and the parent instrument that equals the
concentrator.
For details on normal and concentrator instrument
types, refer to Understanding Instrument Types‚
page 286.

60 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

2. Select the Advanced tab for additional fields.

61
 Advanced Tab of Sample Query Window
Field Description
Minimal status minutes Entering a time in minutes restricts the result set to
those having the specified status for equal to or more
than the specified time in minutes.
NOTE: Exercise caution when entering a Minimal
status minutes value. You can enter a Minimal status
minutes value >= Maximal status minutes value. Under
these conditions, the query returns 0 samples.
Maximal status Entering a time in minutes restricts the result set to
minutes those having the specified status for less than or equal
to the specified time in minutes.
Physician identifier Restricts the result set to those associated with the
physician ID.
Physician last name Restricts the result set to those associated with the
physician’s last name.
Patient location Restricts the result set to those associated with the
patient’s location.
Slide request Slide request parameters include the following choices:
• Not Required - No restriction to the result set based
on slide when Not required is selected.
• Required - Restricts the result set to those with a
slide request.
• Result Required - Restricts the result set to those
with a resulted slide request.
See Understanding Slide Requirements‚ page 75 for
information on slide processing.

62 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Aspirated from and to Restricts the result set to those with at least one
aspiration time within the specified date-time interval.
The first field of each pair is the date. Double-select to
display and select from a calendar. The second field is
the time in hours and minutes.
Requiring LAS update If selected, restricts the result set to samples requiring
an update message to the LAS. This query parameter
is required to set up a command for automatic LAS
communication.
See Viewing the Sample Status Overview‚ page 70.
NOTE: Commands are always associated with a table
and reference both a query, which determines the
records for processing, and a function, which
determines how the records are processed. Automation
is the unattended execution of pre-configured functions
on pre-configured queries. When a command is
defined, your system administrator can create
associated task records that are scheduled for
execution by a task scheduler service.
You can bypass the automatic LAS communication
feature by manually dispatching a workorder to the
LAS. See Addressing Perpetual Pending Issues
through the Dispatch to LAS Function‚ page 83.
Not reported If selected, restricts the result set to samples that do not
have any reports. When generating Sample reports,
you have the option of tagging samples as “Mark as
reported” to differentiate them as being listed in a
generated report.
See Generating a Sample Report‚ page 86 and Mark as
reported‚ page 90 for more information.

63
 Field Description
Filter A filter is a logical-valued, sample site function.
Restricts the result set to those samples for which the
function returns the value True.
Here you can select from a list of filters or create a new
filter.
NOTE: Specifying filters can degrade performance.
Max sample count Restricts the maximum number of samples that can be
returned by the query. Restricting the number of
returned samples can improve response time for
queries that result in large test results.
Sort criterion Specifies the sorting order of the search results. You
have three sort options:
• Sample ID – default
• Priority – Creation time
• Instrument time

3. After entering the parameters, select OK to view the search results.

Viewing the Sample Browser Standard View

Prior to the display of the Sample Query editor window, you have the option of
viewing your query results in standard data view or alternate data view. If you
chose to view the query results in standard view, you selected Start > Routine >
Samples > Query.

64 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Through the standard view, the listed data includes sample ID, priority, patient ID,
collection date/time, physician ID, and status.

To re-enter other search criteria parameters, select Options to re-display the

Sample Query window.

Viewing the Sample Browser Alternate View

Prior to the display of the Sample Query editor window, you have the option of
viewing your query results in standard data view or alternate data view. If you
chose to view the query results in alternate view, you selected Start > Routine >
Samples > Query (Alternate View). Through the alternate view, the listed data

65
 includes sample ID, priority, patient ID and name, status, LAS SeqNo, LAS
general area, LAS specific area, LAS tray ID, LAS tray position, and LAS time.

To re-enter other search criteria parameters, select Options to re-display the

Sample Query window.

Finding out More Information about Each Sample

After a query has successfully returned a sample list, you can obtain additional
information about a sample from the Sample browser window in one of two ways:
• Right-selecting a selected entry to access the context menu
• Double-selecting an entry

66 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Using the Right-Select Menu
Right-selecting a selected sample displays the following options:

Function Description
Check results Applies an automatic check to the results. This function
is useful when norms or delta norms were modified
after result entry.
Container type Specifies tube or other container that contains the
sample.
Diff Pad Opens the Diff Pad, which allows you to perform a
manual diff using the keyboard.
See Understanding the Diff Pad‚ page 73.
Dispatch to LAS Sends an updated workorder to the LAS. Normally,
updated workorders are sent to the LAS automatically
by a task scheduler, which is set up by an administrator.
See Viewing the Sample Status Overview‚ page 70.
You can bypass the automatic process with the
Dispatch to LAS option.
See Workorder Download‚ page 95 and Dispatch to
LAS Function‚ page 96.
See Addressing Perpetual Pending Issues through the
Dispatch to LAS Function‚ page 83.
Instrument Last instrument to process the sample.
Patient Specifies demographic information.
Patient location If specified, displays patient locations such as ER.
Physician ID If specified, displays physicians.
Report Generates a report for a sample. An administrator can
define report generation to run when all results of a
sample are validated.
See Generating a Sample Report‚ page 86.

67
 Function Description
Print label Generates and prints a sample label.
See Generating and Printing Sample Labels‚ page 91.
Rerun Reruns all tests in the sample.
NOTE: When you manually initiate a Rerun by right-
selecting the sample or samples, the Dispatch to LAS
task must be running for the order to be downloaded to
the LAS.
Review and Edit Opens the Review and Edit window
See Understanding the Review and Edit Window‚
page 102.
Set Slide Suppression Enables the creation or removal of a suppression
request for the ADVIA CentraLink system slide test.
See Setting Slide Suppression‚ page 79.
Species Opens the Species window and displays the species
name and description.
Type Opens the Sample Type window and displays the
sample type name and description.
Upload result Opens the Upload results window allowing for you to
specify the test for upload.
Upload validated Uploads validated results to the LIS. A system
results administrator can define automatic upload of the
validated results to run when all results of a sample are
validated.
View image If a sample has an image, you can use this function to
view it.

68 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Function Description
Query LAS status Queries the LAS and provides updated status
information on the Sample browser (Alternate View)
window and on the LAS tab of the Order Entry and
Review and Edit windows.
See Query Download‚ page 97 and Query LAS Status
Function‚ page 98.
Unschedule requests Demotes the status of test requests for which results
are not received from the instrument from Scheduled to
Pending or Rerun.
See Addressing Infinite Schedule issues through the
Unschedule Function‚ page 81.
Upload LAS info Manually uploads current LAS information to the LIS.

Viewing Sample Details

You can obtain details about the sample by double-selecting an entry in the list to
display the Order Entry window. For more information on the Order Entry window,
see Manually Entering a Workorder‚ page 231.
You can obtain an overview of the number of samples in each status category.
See Viewing the Sample Status Overview‚ page 70.

Finding a Single Sample

Access the Samples browser:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Samples > Browse.
2. At the toolbar, select the Find icon.
3. Enter a Sample ID.
4. Select OK.

69
 Viewing the Sample Status Overview
The Sample Status Overview window allows you to verify the number of samples
in each status category as well as the total number of samples in the
database.The Sample Status Overview window displays sample counts grouped
by status and priority.
The counter values indicate the number of samples in a given status at a given
point of time. These values, however, do not always represent the exact quantity
of samples in a given status particularly when there is concurrent activity in other
sessions or batch processes. During the counting process, other processes may
add or delete samples or change their status. For performance, uploaded
samples are not counted directly; their number is obtained by subtracting the
other counters from the total sample count maintained explicitly in the database.
Consequently, negative counter values sometimes display on the Sample Status
Overview window.
Each possible status value is represented in a row. The unknown row is for
samples without any associated requests. The right-most column lists the same
counters, but only displays counter values for samples with priority STAT.
To ensure that the ADVIA CentraLink system database does not grow too large,
you can monitor it and purge results as necessary.
Access the Sample status overview window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Samples > Status Overview.

70 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Sample status overview window displays.

NOTE: When the Sample status overview window displays initially, all fields are
populated with the ? symbol until you select the Refresh button.
To initiate the count and update the view, select the Refresh button.
To remove sample and/or worklist records from the database, select the Purge
button. The Purge data window displays.

71
 Purging Sample and Worklist Data from the Database
You can access the Purge data window through the Sample status overview
window or you can access it as a pulldown option from the System Management
function.
NOTE: As an audit log is generated and written to during the manual purge
process, system performance can be significantly degraded when initiating a
manual purge. If you purge on a regular basis, contact your local technical
support provider to configure a task, which can be scheduled to purge
automatically during off hours so as not to impact response time during peak
operating hours. Task based purges are not audited.
Access the Purge data window:
1. At the Sample status overview window, select Purge.
To access the window from the System Management window, see Purging
Data from the Database‚ page 377.
The Purge data window displays.
Field Description
Days to keep The period of time, starting from the current date back,
for which the data is not purged.
Samples When selected, samples with status Uploaded, Omitted
or Unknown, that is, those samples without requests,
and their dependent data are purged.
Worklists When selected, worklists and their dependent data are
purged.

At the Purge data window, purge samples from the database as follows:
1. At the Days to keep field, enter the period of time in days for which data is not
purged.
2. Select the Samples checkbox.
NOTE: If the Samples checkbox is not selected, no sample records are
purged from the database.
3. Select OK.

72 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Understanding the Diff Pad
The Diff Pad function allows you to use designated keys on the computer
keyboard to increment counters for different blood cell types. You can open the
Diff Pad, the virtual blood differential counter, from any Sample browser window
or from the Review and Edit window.
Although no physical instrument is in actual use, a differential counter is
represented in the ADVIA CentraLink system by an instrument record. Instrument
records become eligible as counters when one or more of their contained
methods have their counter key label field set. The ADVIA CentraLink system
comes pre-configured with a single counter-type instrument called Diff Pad. You
can add other counter-type instruments.
The Diff Pad function can be used whether or not the corresponding tests have
already been requested or if the instrument results already exist. If the tests have
not been requested, the ADVIA CentraLink system automatically adds the tests
to the request when the Diff Pad is used.

Using the Diff Pad

If no instrument is specified in the Diff Pad field on the More tab of the system
Options window, you must enter an instrument to use the Diff Pad. If you attempt
to right-select on a selected sample in the Sample browser window before
specifying an instrument in the Diff Pad field, a list of instruments displays from
which you can select an instrument counter. Should you select an instrument that
is not setup correctly for counters, the following warning message displays: None
of the contained methods have an associated counter key.
When a Diff Pad value is specified in the Diff Pad field on the More tab of the
system Options window, the Sample Counter window displays. This window
consists of the following two lists, which can be updated:
• Contained methods that have counter key labels defined. In the case of the
pre-configured DiffPad instrument, it contains the typical white blood cell
types.
• Contained methods that do not have counter key labels defined. If the counter
instrument is properly configured with additional methods, this list can be
used to view related results.

73
 Upon display of this window, available results are displayed first. These results
can include those obtained from a real instrument. You can select Reset to reset
all counters to zero.
Navigate to the Diff Pad:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select the selected entry and select Diff
pad.
The Diff Pad window displays.

2. While looking through the microscope, use the keyboard to count the different
cell types.
Press the appropriate key to increment the cell count by one. If you make a
mistake or want to restart the count, select the Reset button on the counter
window to set all the counts to zero.
When a total of 100 cells has been counted, you hear a signal indicating that
sufficient data is available.

74 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

3. Select OK.
NOTE: To see the Diff Pad count reflected on the Review and Edit window, close
the Review and Edit window and reopen it.

Understanding Slide Requirements

The ADVIA CentraLink system provides support for communication with the
ADVIA 2120 Autoslide. Slides are implemented as special tests.
You have the following slide function capabilities through the ADVIA CentraLink
system:
• Order a slide and communicate this request to the instrument.
• Set the Set slide suppression command and communicate this information to
the instrument to prevent slides from being generated.
• Reorder a slide on the same existing sample without having to generate a
new workorder on the sample.
• Search the database and retrieve samples that have either a result generated
for the slide or a request for a slide regardless of sample status.

Defining the Test for Slide Processing

Slides are implemented as special tests. By default, the ADVIA CentraLink
system is preconfigured with the slide test defined for slide processing on the
ADVIA 2120 Autoslide.

75
 “Whole blood” is typically configured as the sample type that allows for
processing slide requests and displaying slide information. You can configure
only one sample type to the test that is specified as the slide test.

For example, define the slide processing test with a sample type of Whole blood:

Test name Sample Type

Slide Whole blood
See Configuring Test Settings‚ page 243 for more information on defining tests.

Defining Slide Setup

At this point, the slide test is defined as a test for slide processing and the name
of the slide test, Slide, is assigned to the Slide test field on the More tab of the
system Options window. In addition, the slide information is defined on the Slide
setup window for processing slide requests.

76 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Access the Slide Setup window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Setup slide.
The Slide setup window displays.

Field Description
Test Reference to the name of the test defined for
representing slide preparation.
In the above example, Slide is the name of the slide
test.
Allow LIS download If selected, the ADVIA CentraLink system accepts slide
requests from the LIS.
If not selected, the ADVIA CentraLink system does not
accept slide requests from the LIS. You must enter slide
requests manually or through reflex testing.

77
 Field Description
LIS upload mode Select one of the following options:
• Suppress – Do not allow slide upload information to
the LIS.
• Allow manual only – Allow slide upload information
to the LIS from the Review and Edit window via the
Upload button or from the Sample window via right-
selecting and accessing the Upload result window.
• Allow always – Allows automatic slide upload
information to the LIS.
NOTE: The instrument sends the following slide test
result values back to the ADVIA CentraLink system:
Req., Prod., and Fail. Based on predefined result
choices, the ADVIA CentraLink system converts these
result values to the following: Requested, Produced,
and Failed.
Affects sample status If selected, the presence of a slide test within a sample
does not prevent auto validation of all tests within that
sample.
If not selected, the presence of a slide test within a
sample prevents auto validation of all tests within that
sample.
NOTE: The Affect sample status functionality is not
retroactive. If the Affects sample status checkbox is
selected or unselected within the life cycle of a given
sample, the changed functionality does not affect the
existing slide or its test requests.

Defining the Slide Requirements on the Sample Query window

When initiating a sample query, you specify your slide requirements through the
Slide Request field on the Advanced tab of the Sample Query window. You can
specify the following options:

78 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• Not Required – Result set is not restricted to slide requests or resulted slide
requests.
• Required – Result set is restricted to slide requests.
• Result required – Result set is restricted to resulted slide requests.
After the query is run through the Sample Query window and the sample(s)
display on the Review and Edit window, you can append a comment to a slide
request as you would to any other test request. Comments are appended by
right-selecting on the selected slide request and selecting Edit Comments.
See Appending a Comment to a Request‚ page 152 for more information.

Setting Slide Suppression

You can create or remove a suppression request for the slide test. The Set slide
suppression function enables a request for slide suppression in workorders to
certain instruments including the ADVIA 2120 Autoslide. On setting slide
suppression on a sample, a NoSlide command is sent to the SMS instrument
upon instrument query. If a sample meets the slide criteria but a NoSlide
command is sent to the instrument within the workorder download message, the
SMS instrument does not make a slide for the sample.
NOTE: The Set slide suppression function only suppresses slide creation when
the Set slide suppression function is specified prior to instrument query. If Set
slide suppression is specified after instrument query for workorders, the
requirement is unknown to the instrument and slide creation is not suppressed.
To set up slide suppression navigate to the following window:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select the selected entry and select Set
slide suppression.
The Set slide suppression window displays.

79
 Field Description
Suppress If selected, slide suppression is enabled for the current
sample. A NoSlide command is sent to the SMS
instrument upon instrument query for the respective
SID. Even if the sample meets the slide criteria, the
SMS instrument does not make a slide for the sample.
If not selected, slide suppression is reenabled if
previously enabled for the current sample. If the sample
meets the slide criteria, the SMS instrument can make
a slide for the sample.

Considering Slide Sample Statuses

The following statuses exist for a slide sample:
Status Description
Pending When a slide request is created. The slide request
exists in a workorder from the LIS, or the slide request
was created manually. The request was not sent to the
instrument.
Scheduled The slide request exists and was sent to the instrument.
Review The slide request was processed at the instrument. The
result value of Req. Prod. or Fail. is assigned to the
slide test request and is sent back to the
ADVIA CentraLink system.
Validated The result value assigned to the slide test request is
validated.
Uploaded The slide request has been uploaded to the LIS.

80 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Status Description
Omitted When a slide request is cancelled. To be eligible for
omission, a slide request can be in any status other
than Uploaded.
Pending – When a slide request is Pending and is
omitted, the request is not sent to the instrument.
Scheduled – When the slide request is Scheduled,
exists at the instrument, and is omitted, the slide
request is not accepted back at the ADVIA CentraLink
system.
Rerun The slide request is rerun. Slide requests in status
Validated or Uploaded can be rerun when the Allow
manual rerun all field on the Review tab of the system
Options window is selected.
NOTE: Your local technical support provider can code a
MISPL function to automatically rerun a slide request.

Resolving Scheduling Issues

Addressing Infinite Schedule issues through the Unschedule Function
The Unschedule function addresses “infinite scheduling” issues by enabling the
rerouting of samples to the instrument for those samples for which the
ADVIA CentraLink system never received results from the instrument.
For those requests that remain in status Scheduled indefinitely without a result
message from the instrument, you can select Unschedule from the context menu
of the Sample browser window, the Review and Edit window, or the Request
window.
By invoking the Unschedule command at the sample level or the request level,
the following demotions of Scheduled requests occur depending on the
availability of a previous result:
• Test requests that do not have previous results are demoted from status
Scheduled to status Pending.

81
 • Test requests that have previous results are demoted from status Scheduled
to status Rerun.
• Upon reschedule, the ADVIA CentraLink system sends an updated message
to the LAS, which reroutes the samples to the instrument.
You can specifically query the number of Scheduled requests for which results
have not been returned for a specified amount of time from the Sample query
window. On the Basic tab of the Sample Query window, select Scheduled in the
Minimal status and Maximal status fields. On the Advanced tab of the Sample
Query window, enter the minimum amount of time for which a request must be in
status Scheduled and for which no results are received from the instrument. Test
requests that are in status Scheduled for longer than the specified time are
displayed through the Sample browser window.
Unschedule a test request for which results have not been received from the
instrument:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select the selected entry and select
Unschedule.
The Unschedule requests window displays.

NOTE: At the Request window, right-select and select Unschedule. When

invoking the Unschedule command at the request level, an Unschedule requests
window does not display.

Field Description
Instrument The instrument for which you want to unschedule
requests.
If the instrument is not specified, all scheduled requests
for the sample are unscheduled.

82 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Addressing Perpetual Pending Issues through the Dispatch to LAS Function
The Dispatch to LAS function addresses “perpetual pending” issues by allowing
requests that are in status Pending and Rerun to be sent to the LAS. Ultimately,
the associated samples are rerouted to the instruments again.
For those requests that are in status Pending and Rerun, you can select Dispatch
to LAS from the context menu of the Sample browser window or the Review and
Edit Request window.
You can specifically query requests that are in Pending status for a specified
amount of time from the Sample query window. On the Basic tab of the Sample
Query window, select PND in the Minimal Status and Maximal Status fields. On
the Advanced tab of the Sample Query window, enter the minimum amount of
time for which a request must be in status Pending. Test requests that are in
status Pending for longer than the specified time are displayed through the
Sample browser window.
Send a Pending or Rerun test request to the LAS:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select the selected entry and select
Dispatch to LAS.
The Dispatch to LAS window displays.

Field Description
Target Determines to which LAS system the sample workorder
is dispatched.
Valid values include the following:
1 – Dispatched to LabCell 1.
2 – Dispatched to LabCell 2.
All – Dispatched to both LabCell systems.

83
 Field Description
Include dispatched If selected, the message to the LAS includes requests
that were previously dispatched to the instrument and
are not in status Review.

Addressing Scheduled Twice Issues through the Enable Rescheduling Checkbox

The Enable Rescheduling checkbox addresses “scheduled twice” issues by
allowing for instruments to rerun test requests when the test request has already
been scheduled to another instrument.
When the Enable rescheduling checkbox is not selected, ADVIA CentraLink does
not download workorders upon instrument query when the test request has been
scheduled to another instrument.
Access the Enable Rescheduling checkbox on the Instrument window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
2. Double-select the appropriate instrument.
3. Select or deselect the Enable Rescheduling checkbox.
NOTE: The recommendation is to not select the Enable Rescheduling checkbox.

Viewing the Sample Log Records

The Sample Log table contains an audit trail of information from the LAS to the
ADVIA CentraLink system.
When samples are purged from the database, all associated data from the
Sample Log table is purged.

Accessing Logs of Sample Window

Access records from the Sample Log table:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select the selected entry and select
Logs.
The Logs of sample window displays.

84 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Accessing Sample Log Editor Window
1. To access the Sample log editor window, double-select on the applicable log
entry.
The Sample log editor window displays.

Field Description
Sample Reference to the containing sample.

85
 Field Description
Effective time This value is used to sort the logs. The effective time
value can either be the time that is transmitted by the
LAS or the actual transmission time.
Instrument Reference to the instrument.
Instrument rack Instrument rack as received from the referenced
instrument.
Instrument position Instrument position as received from the referenced
instrument.
LAS seq. no. Identifies which LAS supplied the message: LAS1 or
LAS2.
Status, tray id, tray Values as reported by the LAS.
position, general area,
shelf, door, area, gate

Generating a Sample Report

The Report window enables you to generate reports on samples and to print or
fax the report. Depending on whether you print or fax the report, the report format
can be text or HTML.
Although the text and HTML formats generate reports that look different, the
general layout and information content is the same in both formats. The content
of the generated Sample report is determined by the report model. You can
define different report models for use with different reports.
The ADVIA CentraLink system uses the following logic in determining which
report model to use for a given sample:
• If a sample references a physician and the physician references a report
model, then the report model referenced by the physician is used.
• Else, if the Report model field on the More tab of the system Options window
specifies a report model, then this report model is used.

86 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• Else, a built-in report model, which cannot be configured, is used. This
generic function, accessible from Record > Report, enables you to generate
simple multiple-record text reports with dynamic content.
Select each of the samples that you want to report on by highlighting the sample
and pressing the space bar. To select all the samples in the browser, select the
Select all icon on the editing toolbar. A selection arrow (>) displays next to each
selected sample.
For information on defining report models, which allow you to configure header,
body, and footer information, see Configuring a Report Model‚ page 328.
Generate a Sample report:
1. At the Sample editor window, right-select the selected entry and select
Report.
The Report window displays.

87
 Field Description
Format Select HTML or Text.
The text format requires a line width of up to 132
characters. Ensure that your Windows font or page
orientation settings are properly set to avoid text
wrapping.
Graphs are available in HTML format only. The graphs
might not display properly when scrolling during
preview.
NOTE: This field is disabled and Text displays when the
Via fax checkbox field is selected.
Preview If selected, a screen preview of the generated report is
displayed.
When the specified format is HTML, a web browser is
used for previewing the generated HTML report.

88 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Via fax If selected, enables you to fax a report generated by the
ADVIA CentraLink software through an external fax
software package.
When selected, the Format and Printer fields are
disabled.
Upon report generation, the sample file is output to the
fax software, not to the printer.
When a report model is defined, the
ReportModel.FaxHeader text is added as the header.
When a report model is not defined, a default header
that includes patient identifier and name as well as
physician name and fax number is used.
The way in which the file is sent to the fax system, is
defined as a command in the Fax command field at the
system Options window. In this command, the token &1
is replaced by the full file name, &2 is replaced by the
base file name without a directory path, and &3 is
replaced by the chosen fax number.
Example: “FaxCommand FullFile=&1 BaseFile=&2
Fax=&3” or “copy &1 \\zetafax-xp\ZFAX\SERVER\Z-
TEMP\&2.sub”
Printer The printer reference applies only when the specified
format is Text. References the printer to which the text
output is directed.
When the specified format is HTML, the Windows
environment determines the printer.
NOTE: This field is disabled when the Via fax checkbox
field is selected.

89
 Field Description
Fax number By default when one sample is selected, the fax
number specified in the Fax number field at the
Physicians window automatically populates this field.
You can also enter a different fax number, which
overrides the fax number specified in the Fax Number
field at the Physicians window.
When more than one sample is selected, the ? symbol
populates the Fax number field. If you do not enter a fax
number value, the fax is sent to the fax number
specified in the Fax number field at the Physicians
window for the sample.
Refer to Accessing Physician Records‚ page 239.
NOTE: Do not specify special characters, for example,
+ or -, among the numerical values specified in the fax
number field. Spaces are permitted between numbers,
for example, 0032 9 220 48 10.
Mark as reported If selected, the sample record is marked as having
been reported.
When a sample record is marked as reported, it is not
accessed when a sample query is initiated from the
Sample Query window and the Not reported parameter
on the Advanced tab is selected.

NOTE: Your system administrator can establish automatic reporting by defining a

reporting command, which can be scheduled to run automatically. Commands
are always associated with a table and reference both a query, which determines
the records for processing, and a function, which determines how the records are
processed. The format setting of text or HTML is specified through command
parameters. Do not use the format setting of HTML for automatic reporting. Due
to the extensive use of system resources, the HTML format setting degrades
ADVIA CentraLink server performance.
For details on setting up automatic reporting, contact your local technical support
provider.

90 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Generating and Printing Sample Labels
The Print label window enables you to generate and print sample labels.
To generate sample labels, the definition that defines the sample label text must
be specified on the Label definition field on the More tab of the systems Option
window.
Generate and print a Sample label:
1. At the Sample editor window, right-select the selected entry and select Print
label.
The Print label window displays.

Field Description
Preview A preview of the expanded label displays before the
sample label is printed.
Printer Specifies the printer to which the generated sample
label is output.
NOTE: Upon sample label print, the dynamic text within
the label definition defined on the More tab of the
system Options window is expanded and the output is
stored in a .lbl file before the label output is sent to the
specified printer.

91
Supported Two-Way Communication
The ADVIA CentraLink software supports two-way communication between the
following interfaces:
• The LIS and the ADVIA CentraLink software
• The ADVIA CentraLink software and the LAS
• The ADVIA CentraLink software and the instruments
NOTE: The units of measure for a given test must be defined identically at the
LIS, in the ADVIA CentraLink software, and at the instruments. The units for test
results uploaded from the instrument are not read by the ADVIA CentraLink
software. You must predefine the units for tests in the ADVIA CentraLink software
to match the units for tests on the instrument. If units of measure of results are
manually changed on an instrument, you must change the units of measure for
the test in the ADVIA CentraLink software at that time. In addition, you must
purge all existing results for the test from the ADVIA CentraLink software. Units of
measure are not uploaded to the LIS from the ADVIA CentraLink software.

Communication: LIS and the ADVIA CentraLink Software

Two-way communication between the LIS and the ADVIA CentraLink software
exists.
You have the option of configuring 2 separate communication channels with a
single LIS to enable concurrent downloading of workorder data from the LIS to
the ADVIA CentraLink software and uploading of result data and LAS status
information from the ADVIA CentraLink software to the LIS. While the 2
communication channel configuration is not required, the duplicate
communication channels improve communication efficiency for LIS that are
capable of supporting dual channels.

92 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Should you elect to have the 2 communication channel configuration, a separate
Inbound Translator value and an Outbound Translator value is specified on the
LIS1 tab of the system Options window.

A single communication channel configuration, however, can be maintained for

LIS that do not support dual-channel configuration.
The ADVIA CentraLink system has the ability to send accessioning information,
which is also known as inlabbing information, that it receives from the LAS to the
LIS. Inlabbing information is sent by the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink system
when sample barcodes are read on the automation system. This inlabbing
information serves as notification to the ADVIA CentraLink system that the
sample is in the lab. Inlabbing information can be sent to the LIS from the
ADVIA CentraLink system only once and is sent before result upload to the LIS.

93
 The ADVIA CentraLink software can be configured to upload to the LIS sample
archive and location information for each sample for which it receives information
from the LAS. You have the ability to upload this sample archive and location
information as many times as the ADVIA CentraLink software receives cold
storage message updates from the LAS.
Refer to Update LAS Info Upload: ADVIA CentraLink Software to LIS‚ page 100.

Communication: ADVIA CentraLink System and the LAS

Two-way communication can be established between the ADVIA CentraLink
system and the LAS.
The ADVIA CentraLink system can download workorders to the LAS or query the
LAS for sample location information; the LAS sample status updates are
uploaded to the ADVIA CentraLink system and are available through the Sample
browser (Alternate View) window, the LAS tab of the Review and Edit window,
and the LAS tab of the Order Entry window.
Refer to Workorder and Query Download from ADVIA CentraLink Software to the
LAS‚ page 95 and to LAS Sample Status Update Upload from the LAS to the
ADVIA CentraLink Software‚ page 99.

Configuring Two Automation Systems

ADVIA CentraLink software supports the ability to configure a second automation
system.
When 2 automation systems are configured, the ADVIA CentraLink software
receives all download orders from the LIS and sends all orders to both
ADVIA LabCell systems. If one automation system is temporarily not accepting
orders, upon reestablishing communication with the previously inoperable
system, ADVIA CentraLink sends previously unsent orders to this LAS as well.

94 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

The LAS configuration fields on the LAS tab of the system Options window are
duplicated to provide support for the second automation system.

Workorder and Query Download from ADVIA CentraLink Software to the LAS
The communication between the ADVIA CentraLink system and the LAS consists
of workorder downloads, query downloads, and LAS sample status update
uploads.
Each of these communication messages uses a separate translator–order
translator, status query translator, and status update translator–which are defined
on the LAS tab of the system Options window.

Workorder Download
Workorders that are created within the LIS or within the ADVIA CentraLink
system are sent to the LAS. Workorder messages sent to the LAS do not contain
an instrument specification unless an instrument was explicitly specified when

95
 initiating an Advanced Rerun. See Setting Up Advanced Reruns‚ page 157 for
information on Advanced Reruns.

Dispatch to LAS Function

The Dispatch to LAS function sends workorders to the LAS.
Automatic Dispatch to LAS
Typically this function is defined as a an automated command run by a task and
is assigned to a task scheduler, which initiates the appropriate Dispatch to LAS
command at the specific time on all samples requiring LAS update.
NOTE: When you manually initiate a Rerun by right-selecting the sample or
samples, the Dispatch to LAS task must be running for the order to be
downloaded to the LAS.
When 2 lab automation systems are configured, the Dispatch to LAS function
automatically sends workorders to both LAS.
Your local technical support provider can configure a DeleteRouteOnLAS MISPL
that is triggered through the Dispatch to LAS function. This DeleteRouteOnLAS
MISPL extends the ability to delete an outstanding request on 1 LAS after the
request is processed either on the other LAS, or offline.
Upon executing the Dispatch to LAS function, the delete command is
downloaded to 1 LAS if you have a 1 LAS configuration or to both LAS if you
have a 2 LAS configuration. Upon receipt of the delete command, the Route
status for the request is changed to Deleted in the LineMaster software and the
sample is no longer routed to an instrument for that specific test request. Upon
request deletion, a comment can be added to the user comment field of the
request.
The DeleteRouteOnLAS command is not limited by sample status. For example,
the delete command can be activated on a request in status Uploaded.
The status of the request within the ADVIA CentraLink software remains
unchanged.
Manual Dispatch to LAS
You can also manually initiate the Dispatch to LAS option. This option enables
you to manually send an updated workorder to the LAS.

96 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Initiate a workorder download:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select a selected entry and select
Dispatch to LAS.
The Dispatch to LAS window displays.

Field Description
Target Determines to which LAS system the sample workorder
is dispatched.
Valid values include the following: 1, 2, All.
Include dispatched If selected, the message to the LAS includes requests
that were previously dispatched to the instrument and
are not in status Review.

Query Download
A query download consists of a request for the status of samples on the LAS.
Sample status query messages are sent directly from the ADVIA CentraLink
system to the status query translator. No status update response is expected on
the query channel. The sample status update message is received into the
database from the sample status update translator and translator server running
in batch mode at a later time.
NOTE: The Record Passed message that displays after a query is run indicates
that the sample status query message was sent to the LAS. It does not indicate
that an update message was uploaded from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink
system.

97
 Send a Query Download Message to the LAS
You can send a query to the LAS requesting an update on the selected sample
records or on the focused sample record.
Initiate a LAS status query:
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select a selected entry and select
Query LAS status.
The Query LAS status window displays.

Field Description
Target Determines to which LAS system the sample workorder
is dispatched.
Valid values include the following: 1, 2, All.

Query LAS Status Function

After the query is initiated from the Sample browser window, the Query LAS
status function sends the status query message to the LAS.
When 2 lab automation systems are configured, the Query LAS status function
sends the status query message to both LAS systems. The LASSeqNo
parameter specifies to which LAS system you send the status query message. If
the LASSeqNo parameter is set to All, both automation systems receive the
message.
In response to the query LAS status message, the query translator sends an
acknowledgement to the requesting process.
After initiating a query you can view updated LAS status information from the
following windows:
• At the Sample browser (Alternate View) window, refresh the targeted sample
record or records to see the updated LAS information.

98 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• At the Sample browser window, you can double-select a selected record and
view the updated LAS information on the LAS tab of the Order Entry window.
• At the LAS tab of the Review and Edit window.

LAS Sample Status Update Upload from the LAS to the ADVIA CentraLink Software
A LAS sample status update message consists of the current status of a sample
on the LAS. This LAS sample status update message is uploaded from the LAS
to the ADVIA CentraLink system.
The LAS sample status update upload is initiated in response to a Query LAS
status request or is uploaded automatically when a sample is checked in to the
LAS; reaches an end of route location, such as a Sample Manager Unload tray;
or is archived to Cold Storage within the LineMaster software.
The LAS status information is stored in the Sample Log table and displays
through the following windows:
• Sample Editor window
• Review and Edit window at the Advanced tab and the LAS tab
• Logs of sample browser window
• Sample log editor window
• Sample Query (Alternate View) window
The SeqNo field value of the following windows in the ADVIA CentraLink
software are updated automatically and identify the LAS system that updated the
LAS information:
• Sample Editor window. This window is also referred to as the Manual Order
Entry window. Refer to Updated LAS Information Uploaded to Fields on LAS
Tab‚ page 236.
• Review and Edit window. Refer to Advanced Tab‚ page 114 and LAS Tab‚
page 115.
• Logs of sample browser window. Refer to Accessing Logs of Sample
Window‚ page 84.
• Sample Log editor. Refer to Accessing Sample Log Editor Window‚ page 85.
• Sample Query (Alternate View). Refer to Viewing the Sample Browser
Alternate View‚ page 65.

99
 Update LAS Info Upload: ADVIA CentraLink Software to LIS
You have the ability to upload accessioning information, which is also known as
inlabbing information, as well as sample archive and location information, which
is also referred to as cold storage information, from the ADVIA CentraLink
software to the LIS. While inlabbing information can only be uploaded once,
sample archive and location information can be uploaded as many times as the
ADVIA CentraLink software receives cold storage message updates from the
LAS.
The ADVIA CentraLink software could receive an additional cold storage update
from the LAS, for example, when a sample tube is removed from cold storage,
rechecked into the track, and returned to cold storage after sample testing is
complete.

Update LAS Info Function

The Upload LAS Info function can be configured to automatically upload
inlabbing and cold storage information from the ADVIA CentraLink software to
the LIS through upload messages. Inlabbing information is the auto-receipt
registration of samples checked in to the LAS. Inlabbing information includes the
SID, registration date and time stamp, and location of the sample tube.
If available, the archival cold storage information can include Shelf, Door, Area,
Tray ID, and Tray Position values. You can specify whether shelf, door, and area
information are uploaded via the Upload LAS info window.
Inlabbing information can be sent from the ADVIA CentraLink software to the LIS
only once and must be sent before result upload to the LIS. When 2 automation
systems are configured, the ADVIA CentraLink software can accept more than
one inlabbing message, but the Update LAS Information function only uploads to
the LIS the first inlabbing message received from one of the 2 automation
systems.
Cold storage information can be sent from the ADVIA CentraLink software to the
LIS as many times as a cold storage update is sent from the LAS to the
ADVIA CentraLink software. In order for the LAS to send cold storage information
to the ADVIA CentraLink software, a tray of sample tubes must be removed from
the Sample Manager and archived to a defined cold storage location within the
LineMaster software.

100 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

The Upload LAS info window can be configured to specify whether shelf, door, or
area information is uploaded in the message.
1. At the Sample browser window, right-select the selected entry and select
Upload LAS info.
The Upload LAS info window displays.

Field Description
Include shelf Determines whether the sample tube’s cold storage
shelf is included in the upload message.
Include door Determines whether the sample tube’s cold storage
door is included in the upload message.
Include area Determines whether the sample tube’s cold storage
area is included in the upload message.
NOTE: To prevent the occurrence of a deadlock caused by attempts to access
the same data, do not initiate a manual Upload LAS info function while an
automatic LIS Upload task is running.

101
Understanding the Review and Edit Window
You can review, modify, and disposition test results from connected instruments
through the Review and Edit window.
Several options exist for accessing the Review and Edit window. Those options
that include entering criteria to restrict the display on the Review and Edit window
for a given sample set include the following:

Window Type/Icon Option

Sample query window Allows you to enter sample query criteria and restrict
the sample set that displays on the Review and Edit
window for the current sample query only.
Review and Edit Allows you to restrict the test results displayed in the
window refreshed with Tests and Results area of the Review and Edit window
test result criteria from for the current sample set. The parameters for this
the Request Query restricted sample result set apply until the current
option Review and Edit window session ends.
Toolbar icon that Initiating a single select of a configured toolbar button
contains configured allows you to directly access a prepopulated R&E
sample query criteria window, which displays the current sample set that
and test request meets the defined sample and test request criteria
criteria referenced upon selecting the configured toolbar
button. The parameters for this restricted sample result
set applies to all queries initiated by selecting this
configured toolbar icon until you define new sample
query and request parameters and associate them with
the configured toolbar icon. Toolbar icons can be
configured by users with system manager privileges.

Review and Edit Access through Sample Query Window

To access the Review and Edit window through the Sample query window, you
must first enter sample query selection criteria. On the Sample query window,
you enter parameters that restrict the sample set for this query only. Upon

102 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

selecting OK, the test results that meet the requirements of the sample
parameters are displayed through the Review and Edit window.
Access the Review and Edit window through the Sample query window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Review & Edit.
You can also select the Review and Edit icon at the toolbar menu.
NOTE: If you do not enter parameters to the Sample query window, by
default all samples with a status of Review are accessed and are available for
display through the Review and Edit window. Use the navigation buttons on
the toolbar to navigate from one sample to the next.

103
 The Sample query window displays.

For details on the fields of the Sample query window, refer to Basic Tab of
Sample Query Window‚ page 56 and Advanced Tab of Sample Query
Window‚ page 62.
2. After entering the parameters and selecting OK, the Review and Edit window
displays.
Only one sample ID with all of its associated test results displays on the
window at any given time. Using the navigation buttons on the toolbar, you

104 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 can navigate between samples on the Review and Edit window that match
the query criteria entered on the Sample Query editor window.
NOTE: Upon reviewing a test result, you may find that an error message
displays. Upon display of an error message, you can cancel out of this error and
continue reviewing other test results within the sample.
The ADVIA CentraLink system does not display disposition codes on results from
the ADVIA 120/2120 system. If a result is manually edited at the ADVIA 120/2120
system and then sent to the ADVIA CentraLink system, there is no indication in
the ADVIA CentraLink system that the result was edited.

Areas of Review and Edit Window

1 Demographics
2 Tests and results
3 Disposition

105
 For details on the areas and fields of the Review and Edit window, see Areas and
Fields of the Review and Edit Window‚ page 112.

Review and Edit Window Refresh Using the

Request Query Option
At the Review and Edit window, you can restrict the test results displayed in the
Tests and Results area for the current sample set.
To limit the display of test results within the current sample set to those that meet
specified test request criteria, access the Request Query window from the
Review and Edit window. The parameters for this restricted sample result set
apply until the current Review and Edit window session ends.
Access the Request query window:
1. At the Review and Edit window, select the Options button.
The Request query window displays.

For details on the fields of the Request query window, refer to Fields of the
Request Query Window‚ page 140.
2. After entering the test request criteria that will restrict the test results within
the sample set, select OK.
The refreshed Review and Edit window displays.
The results that display in the Test and Results area are restricted to meet the
request query parameters entered to the Request Query window. The
parameters for this restricted sample result set apply until the current Review
and Edit window session ends.
For details on the areas and fields of the Review and Edit window, see Areas
and Fields of the Review and Edit Window‚ page 112.

106 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Review and Edit Access through Configured Toolbar Icon
After creating a configured toolbar icon and associating sample query and test
request parameters to it, you can select the toolbar icon and directly access the
Review & Edit window populated with the sample set that meets your predefined
sample query and test request parameters.
Each time you select the configured toolbar icon, the same sample query and test
request parameters are reused until you chose to define new sample query and
request parameters via the Review and Edit - Query setup window and associate
these parameters with the configured toolbar icon.

Create Toolbar Icon

Create a toolbar icon to which you will associate sample query and test request
criteria:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Menu > Toolbar
buttons.
The Toolbar button browser window displays.
2. At the toolbar menu, select the New icon or press the Insert button.
The Toolbar button editor window displays.
3. At the Function table field, double-select the ? symbol.
The Tables browser displays.
4. Double-select gp_Site
5. At the Function mnemonic field, double-select the ? symbol.
The Functions defined on table browser displays.
6. Double-select ReviewAndEdit.
The Function mnemonic field of the Toolbar buttons window is populated with
ReviewAndEdit.
7. At the Function parameter set field, double-select the ? symbol.
The Actual parameter sets of function browser displays.
8. At the toolbar menu, select the New icon or press the Insert button.
The Actual function parameter set editor window displays.

107
 The Function table field and Function mnemonic fields are populated with the
values that you had just entered: gp_Site and ReivewAndEdit respectively.
9. At the Short description field, enter a descriptive term.
The maximum number of characters for the Short Description field is 50
characters.
Enter a descriptive term that accurately reflects the function of the toolbar.
The term should signify the sample set that is accessed as per the predefined
sample query and test query parameters that are automatically referenced
upon toolbar icon selection and that will populate the Review and Edit
window.
For example, if you are creating the toolbar button to view a prepopulated
Review and Edit window that contains current sample query and test request
criteria for chemistry samples, enter ReviewCHEM.

Define and Associate Sample Query and Test Request Criteria to Toolbar Icon
Define sample query and test request criteria and associate these parameters to
the created toolbar icon:
1. At the Actual parameter sets of function browser, highlight the newly created
parameter set, right-select, and select Setup.

108 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Review and Edit - Query setup displays.

2. At the Basic and Advanced tabs, enter the sample query parameters that will
restrict the sample set as per your requirements.
The Basic and Advanced tabs of the Review and Edit - Query setup window
contain each of the fields of the Basic and Advanced tabs of the Sample
query window.
For details on the fields of the Sample query window, refer to Basic Tab of
Sample Query Window‚ page 56 and Advanced Tab of Sample Query
Window‚ page 62.

109
 NOTE: On the Basic tab of the Review and Edit - Query setup window, the
status values do not display to the right of the Minimal and Maximal status
fields although these values do display on the Basic tab of the Sample Query
window.
3. At the Requests tab, enter the test request parameters that will restrict the
test results within the restricted sample set.
The Request tab of the Review and Edit - Query setup window contains each
of the fields of the Request query window.
For details on the fields of the Request query window, refer to Fields of the
Request Query Window‚ page 140.
4. After entering all of the sample query and test request parameters at the
Review and Edit - Query setup window, select OK.
The Actual parameter sets of function browser displays.
5. At the Actual parameter sets of function browser window, select OK.
The Toolbar button editor window displays.
The Function parameter set field is populated with the Short description field
value that you entered at the Actual function parameter set editor window.

Define Remaining Toolbar Icon Characteristics

At the Toolbar button editor window, define the remaining fields that characterize
the toolbar icon:
1. At the Label field of the Toolbar button editor window, enter the label that will
display on the toolbar button.
The maximum number of characters for the Label field is 240 characters.
For example, you could enter a label that reflects the window accessed upon
toolbar icon selection, ReviewCHEM.
2. At the Help text field, enter the text that will display on the toolbar button when
the mouse is positioned over the button.
The maximum number of characters for the Help field is 240 characters.
3. At the Image up, Image down, and Image disabled fields, enter the file names
of the image the button displays when it is active but not pressed, pressed,
and disabled.

110 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Image up is the only mandatory file name. These image file names are
located in the <root>/img directory.
NOTE: Images and text are mutually exclusive.
4. To delineate this toolbar button from other toolbar buttons with a vertical line,
select the Insert ruler field checkbox.
5. At the Toolbar button editor window, select OK.
The Toolbar button browser window displays.
6. At the Toolbar button browser window, select Close.

Log Out and Log In to the ADVIA CentraLink Software

To display the toolbar icon that is preconfigured with the sample query and test
request parameters, you must log out and log back in to the ADVIA CentraLink
software:
1. Log in to the ADVIA CentraLink software.
2. At the toolbar, the new Review and Edit icon displays and is identified by the
label or image to which you assigned it.
3. At the toolbar menu, select the newly created toolbar button.
The Review & Edit window displays and is populated with the sample set that
meets your predefined sample query and test request criteria.
NOTE: After selecting the configured toolbar icon and directly accessing the
populated Review & Edit window, you can temporarily override the configured
request query parameters by accessing the Request query window, entering
new request query parameters, and reaccessing the refreshed Review and
Edit window. Refer to Review and Edit Window Refresh Using the Request
Query Option‚ page 106.The newly entered request query parameters for this
restricted sample result set, however, only apply until the current Review and
Edit window session ends. After the current Review and Edit window session
ends and you select the configured toolbar icon, you reaccess a Review and
Edit window populated with the sample set that meets your predefined
sample query and test request parameters.
For details on the fields of the Review and Edit window, refer to Areas and
Fields of the Review and Edit Window‚ page 112.

111
 Areas and Fields of the Review and Edit Window
The Review and Edit window is comprised of three areas:

Areas of Review and Edit Window

1 Demographics
2 Tests and results
3 Disposition

Demographics Area
The Demographics area of the Review and Edit window includes a Basic,
Advanced, and LAS tab. This Demographics section displays sample-specific
information.
If the sample contains a request with associated instrument flags, a warning
triangle displays in the upper right corner of the section.

112 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Basic Tab
The Basic tab includes the following fields:

Field Description
Sample ID Identification number of the displayed sample.
The ADVIA CentraLink software supports Sample IDs
with a maximum of 16 characters.
NOTE: Use caution when using sample ID values
consisting of 16 uppercase alpha characters. While the
sample ID is accepted by the ADVIA CentraLink
software, the 15th and 16th, uppercase, alpha
characters display as if they were truncated in the
ADVIA CentraLink software. Upon subsequent retrieval
of the sample ID at the Sample browser window, the
16th character does not display, and at the Review and
Edit window, both the 15th and 16th characters do not
display. For example, if you enter a sample ID value of
“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP," the sample ID value
"ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO" would display at the Sample
browser window and the sample ID value
"ABCDEFGHIJKLMN" would display at the Review and
Edit window.
You can enlarge the size of the Sample browser
window or Review and Edit window to increase the
Sample ID field and display the full Sample ID value.
NOTE: For information on resizing windows in the
ADVIA CentraLink software, refer to Using the
Workspace‚ page 22.

113
 Field Description
Priority Displays the following priority of the sample:
• Routine
• Stat
• ASAP
Age Age of the patient in years.
Patient ID Patient ID number.
Patient name Name of the patient
Sex Sex of the patient.
DOB Patient date of birth.
Patient location Place where patient is located, for example, ER.
Collection D/T Date and time of the sample collection.
Sample comment Comment associated with the sample.
Patient comment Comment associated with the patient.

Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab includes the following fields:

Field Description
Physician ID Identification number of the associated physician.
Physician name Name of the physician.
Species Species associated with the sample or patient.

114 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Instrument time Time the sample was last detected on the specified
instrument.
Creation time Time the sample record was created.
Sample type Type of the sample.
Instrument Name of the instrument on which the test is performed.
Rack Rack location of the sample at the specified instrument.
Position Position of the sample within the rack location at the
specified instrument.

LAS Tab
The LAS tab includes the following fields:

Field Description
Seq No The sequence number of the LAS system that
uploaded the LAS information.
Time Time the sample was last detected at the LAS.
General area A location field as reported by the LAS. The General
area field includes the following application codes:
• CS – Cold storage
• MT – Main track
• SC – Side car
• OT – Off track

115
 Field Description
Shelf, Door, Area, Location fields as reported by the LAS.
Gate, Tray id, Tray See Viewing the Sample Status Overview‚ page 70.
position

Tests and Results Area

The Tests and Results area consists of request information in a browser format.
You can double-select on any test to see detailed information about the request.

Field Description
Test Name of the requested test.
NOTE: If a test name that consists of 20 characters was
entered at the Test window, the test name value
appears to be truncated in the Test field at the Review
and Edit window. To verify the entire test name, put
your cursor in the Test field and press the right arrow
key until each of the remaining characters of the test
name display. Avoid entering test names that consist of
20 characters.
Sts The status of the request: Pending (PND), Rerun
(RRN), Scheduled (SCH), Review (REV), Validated
(VAL), Uploaded (UPL), Omitted (OMT).
See Understanding Result Status‚ page 124.

116 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Current Current result value.
Every request can have multiple associated results.
Each time a new result value is available, either through
manual entry or automatic upload from an instrument, a
new result record is created to store the value. At the
Review & Edit window, the latest two results display.
The most current result value is stored in this Current
column.
The background of the Current field is color coded to
indicate the accumulated result severity. The
accumulated result severity is the maximum absolute
value of the norm, delta norm, instrument, and QC
severity values. These individual severities are color
coded in the NS, DS, QS, and IS columns respectively.
The following colors display in the Current column
depending on the absolute value of the accumulated
severities:
• Yellow - Displayed when equal to 2.
• Green - Displayed when equal to 1.
• Red - Displayed when greater than or equal to 3.
Red also displays when the patient result generates
one of the following conditions:
- Type error – Patient result has a datatype error.
The datatype of the patient result cannot be
converted to the datatype of the corresponding
test.
NOTE: If a patient result value contains a
comparator and a numeric value, however, the
patient result is treated as a numeric value. A
datatype error condition does not result.

117
 Field Description
Current (Cont’d) - Ambiguous result as per comparator– Patient
result has a comparator that renders the result
value ambiguous with relation to the normal
range. As per the comparator, you cannot
definitively determine whether the result value
falls within the normal range or whether it falls
outside the normal range.
Norm records are checked in sequence according
to their evaluation order.
If a result falls outside the range defined by the Low
and High Limit values, then the Severity value of the
Norm is applied to the result.
If the result does not fall outside the range, the norm
with the next highest evaluation order is checked.
Consider another example, for which the Low Limit
and High Limit normal range values of a test are set
from 0.02 to 10.0:
– If the result value <0.02, the result value is not
ambiguous because the result is definitively outside
the norm range.
– If the result value >10.0, the result value is not
ambiguous because the result is definitively outside
the norm range.
– If the result value <0.19, the result value is
ambiguous because the values may or may not
exceed the norm range. The value <0.19 may be on
either side of the Low Limit of 0.02.
– If the result value >9.99, the result value is
ambiguous because the values may or may not
exceed the norm range. The value >9.99 may be on
either side of the High Limit of 10.0.

118 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
When a test’s normal range is not properly defined
and a result containing a comparator is ambiguous
with respect to the normal range, the respective
norm is considered violated. In addition to the red
color display in the Current column, the result is
held in REV status and must be manually validated.
NOTE: This feature ensures the laboratory is not
accidentally releasing ambiguous results.
If you receive an ambiguous patient result, the
normal ranges are not specified correctly and
should be re-evaluated.
Upon display of this ambiguous patient result on the
Review and Edit window, the following text
populates the Comment field: “Check defined
ranges.”
NOTE: This comment is hard coded and cannot be
overwritten or deleted. This comment is not
uploaded to the LIS and is not printed on patient
reports. This comment serves as an internal note
for the laboratory.
F Flag. An asterisk in the Flag field indicates that a flag is
available. The expanded text associated with this flag is
displayed in the Flag field of the Disposition section
when the result is highlighted.
Prev Run Contains the previous result value of the same sample.
When Rerun is selected, the result value from the
Current field displays here.
NOTE: Enumerated type test results can display
differently in the Prev Run field than in the Current field
if an expansion is defined in the associated result
choice record. The Prev Run field displays the original
input string; the Current field displays the result after
expansion.

119
 Field Description
Prev Samp Contains the most recent result value on a different
sample for the same patient. This value is used for delta
checking.
Date/Time Contains the date and time in which the Prev Samp
value was recorded. Depending on the settings on the
Options window, this date/time stamp may originate
from the LIS or from the ADVIA CentraLink system
database.
Norm Displays the normal range of acceptable values that
have a corresponding severity of 1.
NOTE: If a normal range is not defined or if the defined
range has a corresponding severity value that is not
equal to 1, the ? symbol displays in this field.

120 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
NS, DS, QS, and IS Normal severity, delta norm severity, QC severity, and
instrument severity values.
Normal Range Severity
Suggested values: -3 panic low, -2 very low, -1 low,
<blank> normal, 1 high, 2 very high, 3 panic high
A type error occurs for a patient result when the
received result does not match the Patient data type
field configured for the test.
In ADVIA CentraLink System Software 11, type error
patient results were automatically assigned a norm
severity of 5. In System Software 12, although the
current field within Review and Edit displays a red
background, no norm severity is assigned.
Through the Allow on type error checkbox setting of the
Method window, however, you can configure methods
to either enable or disable autovalidation upon receipt
of type error patient results.
Delta Check Severity
The value represents where the current result is
positioned with reference to a user-defined percentage
or absolute difference of the previous sample result.
At the Delta Norm window, the Limit is absolute
checkbox determines whether a user-defined
percentage or absolute difference of the previous
sample result is taken.
blank = current result within user-defined percentage or
absolute difference of the previous sample result
-1 = current result outside on low side of user-defined
percentage or absolute difference of the previous
sample result
1 = current result outside on high side of user-defined
percentage or absolute difference of the previous
sample result

121
 Field Description
NS, DS, QS, and IS Quality Control Severity
(cont’d) The QC severity value can equal a warning or
moderate or severe control failure depending on how
you group and define the severities relative to the
following:
• Westgard severity
• Instrument severity
• QC severity on type error
• QC severity on invalid reference
For information on setting method severities, refer to
Autovalidation Tab‚ page 309.
Instrument Flag Severity
blank =No flag exists
1-999 = Flag exists. Severity level is user-defined.
The following colors are displayed in the severity
columns:
• Red - Displayed when greater than or equal to 3.
Severe severity outside of normal range.
• Yellow - Displayed when equal to 2. High severity
outside of normal range.
• Green - Displayed when equal to 1. Moderate
severity outside normal range.
See Understanding Review and Edit Severity Columns‚
page 125.

122 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
C Comment.
An asterisk in the Comment field indicates that a
comment is available. The expanded text associated
with this comment is displayed in the Comment field of
the Disposition section when the result is highlighted.
When a type error result or ambiguous result displays
an appropriate comment value displays in the
Comment field.
Some comment values can be manually edited; other
comments are generated system comments that are
hardcoded and cannot be edited.
Instrument The instrument delivering the current result.

123
 Understanding Result Status
You can review results according to their status. A test result can have any of the
following statuses:

Status Description
1 Pending When a test request is created, its status
(PND) is Pending.
2 Rerun A request is demoted from status Review
(RRN) to status Rerun when a manual Rerun is
initiated for the request or an automatic
rerun is initiated.
3 Scheduled When the request is downloaded to an
(SCH) analysis instrument as a workorder in
response to an instrument query, it is
promoted to status Scheduled.
4 Review A request is promoted to status Review
(REV) when a result value gets assigned to it. A
request can also be demoted to status
Review from status Validated by
executing the Invalidate command.
5 Validated A request is promoted to status Validated
(VAL) when its result value is validated through
manual or automatic validation.
6 Uploaded A request is promoted to status Uploaded
(UPL) when it is successfully uploaded to the
LIS, either explicitly by the operator or
through automatic uploading.
7 Omitted A request enters status Omitted when the
(OMT) Omit command is executed on it.

124 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Understanding Review and Edit Severity Columns
The following severity columns exist: NS, DS, QS, IS. A value of blank displays in
the severity columns when a request result is in normal range. Colors
differentiate between different warning levels for test results.
Consider the following scenarios:
• If all the severity columns are blank, the test result value is displayed in black.
No severity exists for the given test result.
• If any of the severity columns contain a value of 1, the result and the severity
column are displayed in green. Moderate severity for the given result is
indicated.
• If any of the severity columns contain a value of 2, the result and the severity
column are displayed in yellow. High severity for the given result is indicated.
• If any of the severity columns contain a value of 3, the result and the severity
column are displayed in red. Severe severity for the given result is indicated.
• If a test request has different severity values among the severity columns, the
highest severity value determines the color of the test result. Consider the
following severity values: NS=0, DS=2, QS=3, IS=0. If a test request has
these severity values, the result is displayed in red and the QS column
displays in red. Accordingly, the DS column displays in yellow and the NS and
IS columns display without color.

125
 Disposition Area

Actions Description
Select Selecting a status from this drop down menu and
selecting Apply, applies a selection arrow (>) next to
each result with the chosen status in the first column
of the Tests and Results area. This allows you to
disposition all tests with the same status.
To disposition all tests in view in the Tests and
Results area, select All from the Select field drop
down menu and select Apply.
A selection arrow displays next to each result in the
first column of the Tests and Results area.
To remove the selection arrows from the results in
view in the Tests and Results area, select None
from the Select field drop down menu and select
Apply. The selection arrows are removed from the
first column of the Tests and Results area for each
result.
To simultaneously clear selected results and select
unselected results in view in the Tests and Results
area, select Invert from the Select field drop down
menu and select Apply.
NOTE: To select a single result in the Tests and
Results area, highlight the result and press Space
Bar.

Flags When a result is highlighted that contains an

asterisk in the Flag column field of the Tests and
Results area, the expanded text associated with this
instrument flag displays in this Flag field.

126 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Actions Description
Comment When a result is highlighted that contains an
asterisk in the Comment column field of the Tests
and Results area, the expanded text associated with
this comment displays in this Comment field.
When a type error result or ambiguous result
displays, an appropriate comment displays through
the Comment field.
For example, when an ambiguous result as per
comparator result is highlighted in the Tests and
Results area, the following value displays in the
Comment field: “Check defined ranges.”
This “Check defined ranges” comment is hard
coded and cannot be overwritten or deleted. This
comment is not uploaded to the LIS and is not
printed on patient reports. This comment serves as
an internal note for the laboratory.
Other comment values that display through the
Comment field can be edited.

127
 Actions Description
Validate (Scroll) Validates results of selected tests, changing the
status from Review to Validated.
The Validate (Scroll) button serves as both a Scroll
button and a Validate button depending on whether
all the pages associated with the test results for this
sample display. The label on the Validate (Scroll)
button displays initially as Scroll. After selecting the
Scroll button, the remaining tests display and the
label on the Validate (Scroll) button changes to
Validate.
In this dual function, the Validate (Scroll) button
eliminates the need for manual scrolling through all
of the pages of test results to activate the Validate
button.
When the Auto-Next after Validation parameter is
selected on the Review and Edit tab of the system
Options window, the next sample in the current
sample query automatically displays after the
current sample is validated.
See Considering Validate Scroll Functionality‚
page 132.
Rerun Submits selected tests for rerun, which changes the
status from Review to Rerun.
When the Allow manual rerun all parameter is
selected on the Review and Edit tab of the system
Options window, all selected tests including those in
status Validated and Uploaded are rerun.
When Rerun is executed, the result value from the
Current field displays in the Prev Run field. The
current result value from the rerun displays in the
Current field.
See Rerunning a Test‚ page 134.

128 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Actions Description
Rerun All The Rerun All button reruns all status Review tests
that are in view in the Tests and Results area
browser regardless of whether the tests are
selected.
When the Allow manual rerun all parameter is
selected on the Review and Edit tab of the Option
window, tests in all statuses including statuses
Validated and Uploaded and excluding status
Omitted that are in view in the Tests and Results
area browser are rerun.
NOTE: LIS driven reruns always permit reruns of
results in status Upload.
Omitted tests, which do not display in the Tests and
Results area, are exempt from rerun.
If any test request participating in a calculation is
rerun, any dependent calculated result requests are
automatically rerun along with it.
When Rerun is executed, the result value from the
Current field displays in the Prev Run field. The
current result value from the rerun displays in the
Current field.
See Rerunning a Test‚ page 134.

129
 Actions Description
Revert Reverts the result of a selected request back to the
result value of a previous run. Only samples in
Review status that have previous results can be
reverted.
Reverting to a previous result actually creates a new
result, which is a copy of the original result record.
The reverted record, however, contains the
following updated field values:
• The user and time fields are updated with the
reverting user and time values.
• The comment field is updated with any auto-
generated comments appended with the
reverted comment value.
You cannot revert calculated results; however, in
reverting the inputs to calculated results, these
results are automatically recalculated. Validated and
uploaded results cannot be reverted.
See Reverting to a Previous Test Result‚ page 135.
Upload Manually sends the validated results to the LIS.
The Upload button is activated when at least one
validated request is visible in the Tests and
Requests section. Upon selecting the validated
tests and selecting the Upload button, all selected
results with a status of Validated are uploaded to the
LIS.
See Manually Uploading Validated Results to the
LIS‚ page 136.
You can also initiate the upload function for selected
results by right-selecting and selecting the Upload
option from the pop-up request menu.

130 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Actions Description
Flags The Flag button is activated only when instrument
flags are associated with the current sample.
Similarly a warning triangle displays in the upper
right corner of the section Disposition section when
instrument flags are associated with the current
sample
Upon selecting the Flag button, the Instrument
Flags window for the current sample is displayed.
On this window, lists of flagged tests that are
grouped by instrument and by flag display.
See Viewing Flag Information‚ page 137.
Image The Image button is activated when the sample has
an associated image result. Selecting this button
activates the View Image function.
For example, the image button is activated for
hematology results that contain cytograms. Upon
selecting the Image button, the cytogram image
sent from the ADVIA 120/2120 system displays.
See Viewing Images‚ page 138.
Options The Options button initiates the display of the
Request Query window. The Request Query
window provides status, status range, test group,
and instrument group parameters that restrict the
test results displayed in the refreshed Tests and
Results area.
See Viewing Request Query Information‚ page 139.
Close Closes the Review and Edit window

131
 Disposition Buttons Functions
Validating Results of One or More Tests
A test can be validated only if it has a status of Review. You can validate all
results with a status of Review, or you can select certain results to validate.
WARNING: If you attempt to validate a result that is already validated, the
ADVIA CentraLink system allows the validation attempt without warning that the
result is in the incorrect status for validation.
By default, all tests with a status of Review have a selection arrow in the first
column of the Review and Edit window. If each of these tests require validation,
simply select Validate to change the status for all at once.

Considering Validate Scroll Functionality

When more test results for a sample ID exist than are in view in the Tests and
Results area of the Review and Edit window, the Validate (Scroll) button is
activated, the Scroll label displays, and the scroll functionality is enabled. Upon
selecting this button, the next sequential test result associated with the sample
automatically come into view in the Tests and Results area. The scroll
functionality is enabled until all of the requests associated with a sample display
in the Tests and Results area. Once all the requests display, the Validate label of
the Validate (Scroll) button displays and the validate functionality is enabled.
Upon selecting this button, all selected tests in Review status are validated.
NOTE: Be careful when selecting the Validate (Scroll) button. If you accidentally
select multiple times, it is possible to validate results for the next record.

Auto Next on Validate

When you select the Validate button and the Auto-Next after Validation checkbox
is selected on the Review and Edit tab of the system Options window, the next
sample in the current sample query displays.
NOTE: If the Auto-skip function is enabled, there may be a delay before the next
sample in the current sample query displays. For details, refer to Auto Skipping
Sample Records that Do Not Match Test Request Criteria‚ page 141.

132 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Auto Validation of Delivered Results
If a result is obtained from an instrument, the result is said to be delivered by the
method identified by the test plus instrument combination. If a result is entered
manually, no auto validation rules are applied.
When a new result is assigned to a request, it is always subject to automatic
range checking and delta checking. This yields the request's norm severity and
delta norm severity, respectively. The request's QC severity is copied from the
current QC value of the method delivering the result. The request's instrument
severity is set to the maximum value of the associated instrument flag’s patient
severity.
The severities obtained are now compared with severity limits to determine
whether or not the result is automatically validated. If a method is available, the
method determines the applicable severity limits. If a method is not available and
the result is obtained through a calculation, the test determines the applicable
severity limits.
When a result is entered manually, no severity limits are available. Automatic
validation only occurs when the defined severity limits are available.

Auto Validation of Calculated Results

Auto validation of calculated test results occurs when all input results are
validated. The auto validation criteria can be applied to the calculated test result
regardless of whether the input tests are coming from two different instruments.
When a method is associated with the calculated test, the method’s auto
validation criteria is used. Consider the following scenario: If requests in Review
status receive a result through a given method and the request's norm, delta
norm, QC, and Instrument severities are all below the respective norm severity
limit, delta norm severity limit, QC severity limit and instrument severity limit, then
the request is automatically validated. If any of the defined limits are left
unspecified, no auto validation occurs.
When a method is not associated with the calculated test or the inputs for the
calculated test come from more than one instrument, the following auto validation
levels, which are defined on the Calculation tab of the Test window, are used:
norm severity limit, delta norm severity limit, QC severity limit, and instrument
severity limit.

133
 Rerunning a Test
You can rerun tests by selecting the following buttons:
• Rerun – The Rerun button submits selected tests for rerun.
• Rerun All – The Rerun All button reruns all status Review tests that are in
view in the Tests and Results area browser regardless of whether the tests
are selected.
Omitted tests, which do not display in the Tests and Results area, are exempt
from rerun.
NOTE: You can also manually initiate a rerun from a test request at the
Review and Edit window by right-selecting the test request and selecting
Sample > Rerun. In initiating this manual rerun, the Dispatch to LAS task
must be running for the order to be downloaded to the LAS.
NOTE: See Setting Up Advanced Reruns‚ page 157 for information on
Advanced Reruns, which is available through right-selecting on a selected
test result.
When a test request participating in a calculation is rerun, any dependent
calculated result requests are automatically rerun along with it. Consider the
following:
• If a test is a component of a calculation defined in the ADVIA CentraLink
system, such as Albumin for the A/G ratio, then the component test and the
ratio test are both rerun when the ratio is scheduled for a rerun. The ratio test
is automatically recalculated upon receipt of all component test results from
the instrument.
• If a test is a component of a calculation that is defined only at the instrument,
the ADVIA CentraLink system is unaware of any connection between
components and calculations and is unable to perform the component test
when only the ratio is scheduled for a rerun.
• Morphology flags associated with the previous result are updated by the
system when the test is rerun.

134 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Upon completion of test reruns, the Current field result value is copied to the Prev
Run field. The new result value for the current re-run displays in the Current field.

Considering Application Level Settings for Rerun

At the Review and Edit tab of the system Options window, you can select the
following checkboxes:
• Allow manual rerun all – Determines whether tests in all statuses, which
includes statuses Validated and Uploaded and excludes status Omitted, are
eligible for user initiated, manual rerun.
NOTE: The ADVIA CentraLink software always accepts a request from the
LIS to rerun a test request, up to and including those test requests with the
status Uploaded, regardless of the Allow manual rerun all checkbox setting.
• Autovalidate reruns – Determines whether the results that are within normal
range after a rerun are eligible for automatic validation. If this option is not
selected, you must validate rerun results manually.
NOTE: Any time a change is made to an application level setting that involves
a user interface change, you must log out of the ADVIA CentraLink system
completely and log back in again for the change to take effect. For example, if
you select the Auto next on validate option on the Review tab of the system
Options window, you must log out and log back in before the ADVIA
CentraLink system automatically displays the next sample in a query when
the current sample is validated.
Any time a change is made to an application level setting that involves a
communication change, the system administrator must stop and re-start
services for this change to take effect.

Enhancing Rerun Efficiency

To maximize system performance during reruns, you are not required to enter
comments prior to executing reruns or to acknowledge reruns upon completion of
test requests.

Reverting to a Previous Test Result

Display the Results of request window from the Review and Edit window:
1. Select a result and select Revert.

135
 The Results of request window displays.

2. Select the result to copy back into the Current column and select OK.
NOTE: Reverting to a previous result actually creates a new result, which is a
copy of the original result record. The reverted record, however, contains updated
user, time, and comment field values.

Manually Uploading Validated Results to the LIS

Depending on lab-specified criteria, when all tests on a sample have status
Validated, the results are automatically scheduled for uploading to the LIS. With
the Upload button, however, you can manually upload validated results within a
sample. You can upload any result that is validated, even if all results in the

136 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

sample are not yet validated. The Upload button is not activated unless at least
one test has a status of Validated.
Manually upload a validated result from the Review and Edit window:
1. Select the Upload button.
The Upload validated results window displays.

Field Description
Include Uploaded If selected, matching requests are uploaded regardless
of whether they were already uploaded.

Viewing Flag Information

The Flags button allows you to view all associated instrument flags. It is activated
only if flags are associated with the current sample.
To access the Instrument flags window from the Review and Edit window to view
the instrument flags for a selected sample select the following button:
1. Select the Flags button.

137
 The Instrument Flag window displays. On this window, lists of flagged tests
that are grouped by instrument and by flag display.

Viewing Images
The Image button allows you to view any images associated with the selected
result.
To access the image associated with a selected result select the following button:
1. Select the Images button.

138 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The associated image displays.

Viewing Request Query Information

Upon display of one of the samples on the Review and Edit window, all the tests
of the sample display.
To limit the display of requests within the current sample to those within a test
group, select the Options button at the Review and Edit window. The Request
Query window displays.
The request query parameters restrict the test results displayed in the Tests and
Results area of the refreshed Review and Edit window.

139
 Access the Request Query Window
At the Review and Edit window, access the Request query window:
1. Select the Options button.
The Request query window displays.

Fields of the Request Query Window

Field Description
Status from and to Restricts the result set to a specific status range.
For example, if you are not interested in viewing
requests already validated, specify the following status
in the Status from and to fields respectively: Pending
and Review.
To view only Omitted results, specify Omitted in both
the Status from field and the to field.
Test group Restricts the result set to requests belonging to the
specified test group.
On re-display of the refreshed Review and Edit window,
only the test requests within the current sample that
belong to this test group display.
Instrument group Restricts the result set to requests belonging to the
specified instrument group.
2. Select OK.

140 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Review and Edit window displays. The results that display in the Test and
Results area are restricted to meet the specified request query parameters.

Auto Skipping Sample Records that Do Not Match Test Request Criteria
When you enter test request criteria to the Request query window, you further
restrict the test results that display for the sample(s) that met the sample query
criteria entered to the Sample Query window.
When the Auto-skip sample feature is enabled on the Review and Edit tab of the
system Options window, those sample records with result records that do not
match the test request query criteria and would otherwise display as empty
sample records on the Review and Edit window are skipped. The empty sample
records are skipped and the next sample record that contains result records that
match the test request criteria displays. By default, the Auto-skip sample feature
is enabled on the Review and Edit tab of the system Options window.
If the Auto-skip Then...
sample feature...
is enabled those sample records with result records that do not
match the test request query criteria do not display as
empty sample records on the Review and Edit window.
These empty sample records are skipped, and the next
sample record that contains result records that match
the test request criteria displays.
In addition to automatically displaying only those
sample records with result records that match the test
request criteria entered on the Request query window,
the Auto-skip feature also skips the display of empty
sample records when you navigate as follows:
• Select the Next page/Previous page or Next record/
Previous record buttons of the toolbar.
• Select the Validate button on the Review and Edit
window.
• Press the Page Up or Page Dn buttons on the
keyboard.

141
 If the Auto-skip Then...
sample feature...
is not enabled those sample records with result records that do not
match the test request query criteria display as empty
sample records on the Review and Edit window.
You must manually navigate past these empty sample
records by doing one of the following:
• Selecting the Next page or Next record buttons of
the toolbar.
• Pressing the Page Up or Page Dn buttons on the
keyboard.

After 5 sample records with non-matching result records are automatically

skipped, a message displays informing you of skipped records. At any time
during the auto-skip process, you can stop the process of automatically skipping
records by pressing <CTRL><BREAK>.

Right-Selecting Functions
Viewing Results of Requests
Although the most current 2 results display on the Review and Edit window for a
given sample, every test request can have multiple result records associated with
it. You can view each of the result records associated with a test request on the
Results of request window. New result values are uploaded from an instrument,
or they can be entered manually.
A new result value for a given test request is saved as a new record when it is
received within the sample reuse period, which is a configurable time period,
known as the sample reuse period.

Configurable Sample Reuse Period

The value for this configurable time period is expressed in days and is defined in
the Sample reuse period field at the More tab of the system Options window. If no
day value is specified and the Sample reuse period field value is populated with
the ? symbol, the default value of 30 is used. The sample reuse period values
can range from 1 to 365.

142 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

When the ADVIA CentraLink software receives a new result, it verifies whether
the elapsed time period between the last posted result date plus the Sample
reuse period value is greater than the date of the new result.
(Last result date) + Sample reuse period > Date of new result

If the last result date + Then the new result value is...
Sample reuse period...
is greater than the date of saved.
the new result The last result date is updated with the current
date.
You can view the new result value in the Results of
request window; the last result date does not
display on the window, but is stored in the Sample
table.
is equal to or less than the not saved.
date of the new result An error message is logged in the instrument
Service log.
The following comment is added to the sample
specifying that results were discarded due to
results extending beyond the Sample reuse
period: “Results discarded – sample reuse time
has elapsed for sample <Sample.Identifier>
(<Instrument.Name>-<CurrentDateTime>).”
This comment displays in the Sample Comment
field of the Review and Edit window.

143
 At the Review and Edit window, access the Results of request window:
1. Right-select a result and select Related > Result.
The Results of request window displays.

NOTE: If you right-select a result of the Results of request window, the View
result option is available from the dropdown menu. This View result option
allows for you to view either hematology results that contain cytograms as a
cytogram image or to view electrophoresis results of type Graph as a
graphical display. When the Upload graphs option on the LIS 2 tab of the
systems Option window is selected, electrophoresis results are uploaded to
the LIS. While electrophoresis is supported, the functionality is not currently
used in the ADVIA CentraLink software.
2. To access the details of a listed result, double-select the result.

144 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Result window displays.

General Tab

Field Description
Status The status of the test request:
• Pending - Status when a test request is
downloaded to an instrument as a workorder in
response to an instrument query. A value is
expected from the instrument that queried for
the sample.
• Available - Status when a result value is
assigned to a test request.

145
 Field Description
Schedule user Reference to the user who created the result
record that exists in status Scheduled. As this is
typically performed by a background process, the
user is usually set to batch.
Schedule time The date and time when the result record was
created in status Scheduled.
Method Reference to the method record, and thereby the
associated instrument and test, through which the
result was obtained.
For manually entered results, this field is not
populated.
Aspiration time Date and time the sample was aspirated at the
instrument.
Test completed time Date and time in which the test was completed at
the instrument.
Availability user Reference to the user who entered the result
record.
For values obtained from instruments by a
background process, the user is typically set to
batch.
Availability time Time when the result value was stored to the
database.
Value Raw text value supplied by the user or by the
instrument. Unlike the string value associated with
the request record, no rounding or expansion is
applied to this value.
Auto dilution coefficient Dilution coefficient uploaded by the instrument
with the result.

146 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Auto dilution condition Dilution condition uploaded by the instrument with
the result.
Manual dilution coefficient Value by which results are multiplied after a
manual dilution.
QC severity QC severity value of the associated method, at the
time the value was copied from the method.
Reagent information When a patient result is received from an
instrument and ADVIA CentraLink driver that
support the upload of reagent information, the
reagent information is saved directly to this field.
The reagent information can consist of the reagent
lot number, reagent expiration date, and the
reagent sequence number.
The reagent information value stored in this field
can also be inherited from the Reagent information
field of the Method; however, reagent information
received at the result level has priority over global
reagent information stored at the Method.
If the Reagent information field on the LIS 2 tab at
the systems Option window is enabled, result
specific reagent information is uploaded to the LIS.

147
 Comments Tab

Field Description
Instrument comment Comment uploaded by the instrument along with the
result value.
Parse comment Comment generated by the result value parser.
Range comment Comment generated during automatic application of
norms and delta norms.
User comment Comment a user added to the Edit request comment
window.

148 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Omitting a Test
The omit function allows you to cancel any further processing, including
reporting, for the selected test. The test result status changes to Omitted. You
cannot omit records that were uploaded.
If a request participating in a calculation is omitted, the calculated result request
is automatically omitted.
If a component test is omitted, the ratio test is automatically omitted. If a ratio test
is omitted, the component tests remain available. Select only those tests that you
want to omit.
Access the Omit window from the Review and Edit window:
1. Right-select the selected test and select Omit.
The Omit window displays.

2. At the Omit window, type a comment into the Note field to record the reason
the test was omitted.
3. Select OK.

Viewing Omitted Results

1. Open the Review and Edit window for the sample with Omitted results.
2. Select View > Query > Reopen on the menu bar or select the Options button
on the lower left of the Review and Edit window.
The Request Query window displays.
3. At the pulldown menus at the Status From and To fields, select Omitted and
select OK.
The results display on the Review and Edit window.

149
 Viewing the Omission Note through the Request Window
1. At the Review and Edit window, double-select the selected test.
The Request window displays.
2. Select the Audit tab.
The text populates the Omission note field.

Invalidating Results
To change the status of a request from Validate back to Review, select one or
more results with status Validate, right-select on the Review and Edit window,
and select the Invalidate option.
If any request participating in a calculation is invalidated, the calculated result
request is automatically invalidated with it.

Viewing Results Graphically

The View Result function allows you to view either hematology results that
contain cytograms as a cytogram image or to view electrophoresis results of type
Graph as a graphical display. When the Upload graphs option on the LIS 2 tab of
the systems Option window is selected, electrophoresis results are uploaded to
the LIS.
NOTE: While electrophoresis is supported, the functionality is not currently used
in the ADVIA CentraLink software.

Viewing QC Results for a Test

When reviewing a sample, you can investigate a quality control severity by
navigating from the Review and Edit window to the QC Results window.
Access the QC Results (Across controls view) window to see the QC results of a
selected test on the Review and Edit window:
1. Right-select the selected test and select View QC.

150 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The QC Results window displays the relevant QC results.

Example: A QC severity error on a glucose test for an ADVIA 1650_2 displays on

the Review and Edit window. The glucose test is defined in the ADVIA CentraLink
system with three different QC levels for glucose. Since the last closeout, these
three levels were run twice each. To investigate the quality control implications,
select this glucose test on the Review and Edit window, right-select and select
View QC. The QC Results Across Controls View window displays all the QC
results for this glucose test on the Advia 1650_2 instrument since the last
closeout. You can view the entire control history for this assay and instrument.
See Understanding Quality Control‚ page 172 for information on Quality Control
functionality.

151
 Editing Test Results
You can manually edit a test result. If the edited result value exceeds the normal
range, the severity fields are updated with the appropriate severity value; the
color of the severity column and of the result value changes according to the
severity.
Access the Edit result window from a selected test on the Review and Edit
window:
1. Right-select the selected test and select Edit Result.
The Edit Result window displays.

NOTE: Editing results causes ratios to be recalculated when the test is defined as
a component of a ratio test. For example, if you manually edit an RBC result, the
HCT result is recalculated since the RBC value is a component of the HCT ratio
test.

Appending a Comment to a Request

You can add or edit a user comment for the result associated with the request.
The comment can be either a free text comment or a coded comment, which
when updated through the Edit Comment for Request window is expanded into
the text associated with the comment code.
The comment field is dynamic-text enabled and is linked to the Request table.
Dynamic text is the mechanism used by the ADVIA CentraLink system to
dynamically expand text segments by substituting MISPL content or references
to text records. Text records are reusable text modules that can be referenced
from any dynamic text enabled field.
For a comment code to expand into text, you must define the text for a comment
and associate it with the comment code.

152 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Define the text for a comment and associate this text with a comment code:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Texts > By
Mnemonic.
The Text Record browser window displays.
Select the New icon and the Text editor window displays.

Field Description
Mnemonic The code that uniquely identifies the comment text.
The maximum number of characters for the Mnemonic
field is 60 characters.
For example, enter the code RR. This is the code that is
associated with the text: Rerun Request.
Class Classification string for use in queries.
Description Describes the text.

153
 Field Description
Table Refers to the table to which the comment text is linked.
The maximum number of characters for the Text field is
31921 characters.
Mandatory field entry.
Text This is the comment text that is associated with the
comment code, otherwise referred to as the mnemonic,
and displays as a comment through the Comment field
of the Review and Edit window.
For example, enter the text: Rerun Request. This is the
comment text that is associated with the code RR.
Start / End Dates Dates specifying the time period in which the code and
associated text can be used.

2. To associate the comment text with the comment code, select OK.
Append a coded comment to a test result on the Review and Edit window:
1. Right-select the selected test and select Edit Result Comment.
The Edit Comment window displays.

2. In the comment field of the Edit Comment window, enter a forward slash:(/)
followed by the comment code, which was entered to the Mnemonic field of
the Text editor window. In this example, enter the value ‘/RR.’

154 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The forward slash is the mechanism through which the ADVIA CentraLink
system recognizes that a coded comment follows.
3. Upon selecting Update, the ADVIA CentraLink system queries the table
defined in the Text window and accesses the Text associated with the coded
comment.
The expanded comment text displays in the Comment field of the Review and
Edit window. The Edit Comment window displays the following: {<RR}. The
coded comment is stored to the database.
Once the comment text is expanded in the Edit Comment window, you can
add free text before or after the comment.
You can view this expanded comment through the Comment tab of the Request
window by double-selecting the request.

Considering Application Level Settings for Comment Upload to LIS

At the LIS2 tab of the system Options window, you can select the following
checkboxes:
• Upload result comments – Determines whether the result comment is
uploaded to the LIS on a patient result upload.
• Expand text on upload – Determines whether the coded comments are
expanded prior to upload to the LIS on a patient result upload or a QC result
upload.
Other LIS2 tab parameters on the system Options window include the following
comments:
• Upload instrument flags – Determines whether instrument flags are uploaded
to the LIS on patient result upload.
NOTE: If this checkbox is not selected, invalid results could potentially be
uploaded to the LIS.
• Upload patient comments – Determines whether patient comments are
uploaded to the LIS on patient result upload.
• Upload sample comments – Determines whether sample comments are
uploaded to the LIS on patient result upload.
• Upload QC result comments – determines whether QC result comments are
uploaded to the LIS on QC result upload.

155
 • Upload parse comments – Determines whether parse comments, which are
generated by the result value parser, are included with result and QC result
comments uploaded to the LIS on patient result upload or QC result upload.

Specifying a Dilution Factor

You can specify an auto dilution coefficient and auto dilution condition for
requests in Pending or Rerun status through the Set auto dilution window and for
requests in Review status through the Advanced rerun window.
If the auto dilution coefficient or auto dilution condition values are specified on
these windows, the corresponding values assigned to the request from the LIS
are overwritten. You cannot revert back to the LIS values unless you manually
reenter the values through the Set auto dilution window.
When an auto dilution coefficient or auto dilution condition value or both are
specified, these values are downloaded upon workorder download in response to
the instrument query as long as dilution download is supported by the instrument
protocol. When specified, the workorder message contains the auto dilution
coefficient or auto dilution condition values from either the LIS or those manually
entered through the Set auto dilution or Advanced rerun windows.

Setting Up Auto Dilution

You enter parameters to the Set auto dilution window for those tests in which you
want the initial test run to be diluted. Unlike a dilution that might occur during an
advanced rerun on a test that was processed at least once, an auto dilution
configured on the Set auto dilution window is a dilution that occurs the first time
the test request is processed.
For requests in Pending and Rerun status, you can specify an auto dilution
coefficient and auto dilution condition through the Set auto dilution window.
On the Set auto dilution window, the specified auto dilution coefficient and
condition parameters apply only to the highlighted test request that exists in
Pending or Rerun status on the Review and Edit window and from which the Set
auto dilution window is accessed.
These parameters do not apply to multiple records. Instead the parameters are
test request specific and are set at the request level. As such, the parameters

156 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

apply only to the highlighted test request on the Review and Edit window, not to
all of the selected records.
NOTE: Your local technical support provider can implement a MISPL site function
to automatically apply the desired dilution based on your workflow.
From the Review and Edit window, access the Set auto dilution window:
1. Right-select the selected test and select Setup auto dilution.
The Set auto dilution window displays.

Field Description
Coefficient Depending on the instrument, leave as the default ?
symbol or enter the desired dilution coefficient to be
included in the workorder downloaded to the
instrument.
Condition Depending on the instrument, leave as the default ?
symbol or double-select to select from a list of pre-
defined Dilution conditions to be included in the
workorder downloaded to the instrument.

Setting Up Advanced Reruns

You enter parameters to the Advanced reruns window for those tests that have
already been processed at least once. Unlike a first time auto dilution that would
be configured on the Set auto dilution window, an auto dilution configured on the
Advanced rerun window is a dilution that is defined for a test request that was
processed at least once and is being rerun.
For requests in Review status, you can specify an auto dilution coefficient and
auto dilution condition through the Advanced rerun window. The advanced rerun

157
 feature allows for entry of a manual or automatic dilution factor and for
instrument-specific reruns.
NOTE: The Advanced Rerun function is multi-record enabled. The Advanced
Rerun applies to all selected requests on the Review and Edit window, not just
the highlighted test request.
Manual Dilution
To accommodate the concept of manual dilutions for reruns, you must specify a
Dilution type of Manual at the Advanced Rerun window. For the test request, you
enter a dilution coefficient, also known as a factor.
The condition field is not used for a Manual Dilution and the field displays
containing a gray ? symbol. In selecting a Dilution type of Manual, the Dilution
coefficient field is not downloaded to the instrument with the workorder. As such,
the dilution must be performed manually at the instrument to reflect the dilution
coefficient field value entered on the Advanced rerun window. The actual dilution
completed on the sample must correspond to the manual dilution coefficient
value.
When the ADVIA CentraLink software receives a result for a manual dilution test
from an instrument, the received result is multiplied by the manual dilution
coefficient value that was entered on the Advanced Rerun window.
Auto Dilution
To accommodate the concept of automatic dilutions for reruns, you must specify
a Dilution type of Auto at the Advanced Rerun window.
In selecting a Dilution type of Auto, the Dilution coefficient and condition fields are
downloaded to the instrument with the workorder. The auto dilution occurs
automatically at the instrument without manual intervention. The actual dilution
completed on the sample directly corresponds to the dilution coefficient value that
was downloaded from the ADVIA CentraLink software.
When the result is uploaded from the instrument to the ADVIA CentraLink
software, the result is not altered by the ADVIA CentraLink software.
In addition, your local technical support provider can implement a MISPL site
function to automatically apply the desired dilution based on your workflow.
You can also specify automatic dilutions on first dilution requests through the Set
auto dilution window. See Setting Up Auto Dilution‚ page 156.

158 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

NOTE: The Instrument field on the Advanced Rerun window, which is designed to
explicitly specify the instrument where the rerun is to be performed, is scheduled
to be supported in a future release of the LAS software.
On the Advanced rerun window, the specified auto dilution coefficient and
condition parameters apply to each of the test requests that exist in Review
status and that are selected on the Review and Edit window prior to accessing
the Advanced rerun window.
These parameters are not test-request specific. Instead the parameters are multi
record enabled. As such the parameters apply to all selected records on the
Review and Edit window, not just to the highlighted test request.
NOTE: When specifying an auto dilution condition and or coefficient using the
Advanced Rerun window, select only one test request.
Access the Advanced rerun window from the Review and Edit window:
1. Right-select the selected test and select Advanced Rerun.

159
 The Advanced rerun window displays.

Field Description
Instrument Instrument to which you explicitly target the rerun.
This instrument overrides the default LAS rerun routing.
NOTE: The Instrument field on the Advanced Rerun
window, which is designed to explicitly specify the
instrument where the rerun is to be performed, is
scheduled to be supported in a future release of the
LAS software.

160 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Dilution type Select one of the following 3 dilution types:
• Manual - Manual dilution is specified. When the
result is uploaded from the instrument after a
manual dilution, the ADVIA CentraLink software
multiplies the instrument result by the dilution
coefficient value.
• Auto - Auto dilution is specified. For auto dilutions, a
dilution factor Is downloaded to the instrument with
the workorder. The dilution occurs automatically at
the instrument without manual intervention. When
the result is uploaded from the instrument after an
auto dilution, the ADVIA CentraLink software does
not modify this instrument result value.
• None - While no dilution is specified, the rerun is
targeted to occur on the instrument specified in the
Instrument field. The instrument targeted rerun
occurs without dilution.
NOTE: The Instrument field on the Advanced Rerun
window, which is designed to explicitly specify the
instrument where the rerun is to be performed, is
scheduled to be supported in a future release of the
LAS software.

161
 Field Description
Dilution coefficient Manual Dilution
When dilution type of Manual is specified prior to rerun,
the dilution coefficient value indicates how much the
sample must be diluted.
After rerun, this value is multiplied against the result
received from the instrument to correct the result for
dilution.
For example, you enter the value 2 for the manual
dilution coefficient. Prior to rerun, the sample must be
manually diluted with an equal amount diluent. After
rerun, the incoming instrument result is automatically
multiplied by 2 to correct for dilution.
The specified manual dilution coefficient is not
communicated to the instrument for automatic onboard
dilution.
The dilution coefficient must be at least 1.
Upon entering a change to the Dilution coefficient field
for a manual dilution, a message displays warning that
after upload from the instrument, the result will be
multiplied by the Manual dilution coefficient. You are
prompted to select Yes to confirm that after upload from
the instrument, the result will be multiplied by the
Manual dilution coefficient.
Auto Dilution
When dilution type of Auto is specified, the dilution
coefficient value is downloaded with the workorder to
the instrument.
The instrument dilutes the sample as per the value in
the dilution coefficient field without manual intervention.
When the result is uploaded from the instrument after
an auto dilution, the ADVIA CentraLink software does
not modify this instrument result value.

162 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Dilution condition This field is enabled when you select Dilution type,
Auto.
Certain instruments require the use of a dilution
condition. Depending on the instrument in which the
dilution occurs, double-select in the Dilution condition
field and select from a list of available values for the
auto dilution condition.
Comment Allows for entry or free text comments or coded
comments.

You can also view manual and auto dilution data through the Dilution tab on the
Request window by double-selecting the request.

163
 Viewing Test Request Information
View the details of a test request on the Review and Edit window:
1. Double-select the selected test.
The Request window displays.

The top part of the Request window displays the following fields:

Field Description
Test Requested test name.
Origin The origin of the request can be External when the
LIS downloads the order for the request, Internal
when the test was requested through the
ADVIA CentraLink system manual order entry,
reflex testing, or a component from a ratio test, or
Unsolicited when a test result was received from
the instrument without a request available in the
ADVIA CentraLink system. Normally the origin is
External.

164 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Status Test request status: Pending, Rerun, Scheduled,
Review, Validated, Uploaded, or Omitted.
Instrument The instrument from which the result is expected
or the instrument delivering the result.
Patient History time This equals the sample collection time, or when
the collection time is not available, the sample
creation time. The time specified in this field is
used for delta checking if, at the application level,
the previous result origin is set to “local” in the
ADVIA CentraLink system database.
Aspiration time Time when the instrument aspirated the sample.
String value Text representation of the result value. Rounding
for numerical tests is indicated.
The bottom part of the Request window consists of six tabs.

Result Detail tab

Upon display of the Request window, the Result Detail tab is activated. The
Result Detail tab displays associated result aspects by name (Aspect) and Value.
Aspects include ALGC (allergen code), CSN (country-specific allergen), CLSS
(allergy class), INDX (result index value), and COFF (Cut off).

165
 Dilution tab

Field Description
Coefficient The dilution coefficient as requested through the
workorder downloaded from the LIS or as
specified using the Advanced rerun or Set auto
dilution functions.
Condition The dilution condition, such as Neat, Down, or Up,
as requested through the workorder downloaded
from the LIS or as specified using the Advanced
rerun or Set auto dilution functions.
Result coefficient The dilution coefficient as reported by the
instrument.
Result condition The dilution condition (Neat, Down or Up) as
reported by the instrument.

166 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Manual coefficient The manual coefficient is the manual dilution
coefficient specified on the Advanced rerun
window.
When a result for the request is received from the
instrument after manual dilution, the manual
dilution coefficient is multiplied against the result.
This manual coefficient value and the calculated
result value are stored in the result record. Then,
the manual dilution coefficient value is cleared to
prevent it from being applied to subsequent
results.
Result manual coefficient Contains the manual dilution value used to obtain
the current result value.

167
 Severity Tab

The Severity tab includes the following fields:

Field Description
Norm Displayed when the result is outside the norm ranges. The
scale of the severity number reflects your range severity
definitions.
It is positive when the result is above the high limit, or
negative when the result is below the low limit.
Delta norm A delta check severity is assigned only if a previous sample
result matching the same patient and test can be found and,
depending on how the delta norm is defined, if the maximum
percent difference or absolute difference is exceeded.
QC The QC severity value can equal a warning, moderate or
severe control failure depending on how you group and define
the severities relative to the available Westgard rules.

168 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Field Description
Instrument Automatically set to the highest severity of the associated
patient severity instrument flags.
NOTE: If the Patient severity flag value on the Instrument Flag
window is greater than this instrument severity value, then the
Patient severity flag value on the Instrument Flag window
overwrites this instrument severity value.
Aggregate An aggregate of the other four severities. It is automatically
set to their highest absolute value. If this aggregate value is
different from zero, the result in Review and Edit is red.

Comment tab
The Comment field of the Comment tab includes free text that is received from
the LIS with the request.

169
 Audit tab

The Audit tab includes the following fields:

Field Description
Validation time Date and time the result was validated by the
validation user.
Upload time Date and time the result was uploaded to the LIS
by the Upload user.
Omission time Date and time the request was omitted by the
Omission user.
Omission note Contains the reason for omission, if applicable.
Validation user User who initiated the validation.
Upload user User who initiated the upload.

170 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Omission user User who initiated the omission.

LIS Previous Result Tab

The LIS tab includes the following fields:

Field Description
Date/Time Lists the date and time in which each previous
result value for the request was transmitted by the
LIS.
Result value Sorted in order of the most recently received
result, lists all previous results transmitted by the
LIS for the request.

171
Understanding Quality Control
The Quality Control (QC) function allows you to view and print the QC data
collected from all connected instruments. The data can represent control samples
or patient samples. In either case, each group of QC results pertaining to a given
sample is represented by a dedicated QC population to which you can apply
Westgard rule-based control checking and define hold upon failure criteria. You
can view the QC results of a sample in numerical-tabular format or Levey-
Jennings graphical format through the QC Results (Across controls view) window
and through the QC Populations window. You can generate printed reports that
contain graphs and numerical data and statistics by lot or by population.
Control-Based QC Results
Control-based QC results are obtained from tests on samples drawn from QC
material. They are received in populations identified by instrument and QC lot.
For each QC lot record that you create, you must create population records to
hold the target values and ranges per test. You can access other populations
using the QC Lot window.
QC results are included in Westgard checking when they have a numeric value
other than unknown and an Instrument Severity of 0.
QC results that contain a supported comparator can be configured to participate
in Westgard checking, however, these results do not participate in statistics.
Patient-Based QC Results
Patient-based QC results, also called moving average results, are obtained by
averaging test results from patient samples. They are received in populations
defined by instrument and patient species. Moving average populations are
created automatically as incoming results are stored.
Patient results uploaded from an instrument are used for patient-based QC only
when the Check moving average checkbox of the Method window is selected.
When selected, Bull's algorithm smooths the incoming data and generates a new
QC result per instrument batch. You can influence the smothing level by
increasing the value of the Moving average batch size field on the Instrument
window. The larger the batch, the fewer the number of QC results generated and
the less they vary.
Patient results that contain a comparator do not participate in moving averages.

172 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

QC Lots
The QC Lot window provides access to the QC Lot table, which stores records
representing quality control lots. All QC tests performed on the same QC material
are grouped into a QC lot. All QC Lots must be defined in the ADVIA CentraLink
system; otherwise, results for these QC lots are ignored.
Access the QC Lot window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality control > QC lots > By
name, lot number.
The QC Lot query window displays.

Field Description
Name The name of the QC lot.
Include expired If selected, expired QC lots as well as current QC lots
are included in the display on the QC Lots browser.
If not selected, only current QC lots are included in the
display.

2. To initiate the query and populate the QC Lots browser with the relevant QC
Lots, select OK.

173
 Upon display, the QC Lots browser is automatically sorted by Name followed
by Lot Number.

3. To access the QC Lot editor window, double-select a lot on the QC Lots

browser window.

174 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The QC Lot editor window displays.

Field Description
Lot Number Unique identifier of the QC lot.
Name Name of the QC lot.
Level Value that describes the lot level. Required for Bio-Rad,
a manufacturer of control material, and other
manufacturers.
This alphanumeric field has a default value that
displays as the ? symbol.
NOTE: This field must be populated with a QC lot level
value, if you plan to export QC results using the Bio-
Rad point data format. If a level value is not entered, an
error message displays informing you that the lot level
is empty.
See Exporting QC Populations to Text and XML Files‚
page 189.
Description Free text area for describing the QC lot.

175
 Field Description
Start Date Start date before which the lot cannot be used.
Expiration Date End date after which the lot cannot be used.

Adding a New QC Lot

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality control > QC lots > By
name, lot number.
The QC Lot query window displays.
2. At the QC Lot query window, select OK.
The QC Lots browser window displays.
3. At the QC Lots browser window, select New on the editing toolbar.
The QC Lots editor window displays.
4. Enter the lot number.
The number must match the number entered at the instrument.
5. Type in the new name, level, description, and dates for the new QC lot.
NOTE: You must fill in all fields accurately to avoid unmatched results.
Ensure that the Expiration date is later than the Start date.
6. Select OK.

Specifying Test and Instrument Parameters for a QC Lot

Once QC lots are established, you can specify test and instrument parameters for
each QC lot. In grouping a QC lot with test and instrument parameters and
specifying target values and deviations, you allow for the QC results to be
associated with a QC population that accumulates statistics.
Specify test and instrument parameters for a QC lot from the QC lots window:
1. Right-select the selected lot that requires test and instrument parameters and
select Populations.
The QC populations query window displays. See QC Populations‚ page 177
for more information.

176 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Automating QC Result Upload to the LIS
The system can be configured for automatic upload of raw QC data to the LIS by
scheduling this function on all QC lots.
The ADVIA CentraLink system comes pre-configured with an upload command.
Regardless, you must define a task and associate the command with a task
scheduler. See Scheduling Tasks‚ page 378.

QC Populations
The QC Populations window provides access to the QC population table, which
stores records representing statistical populations of QC results sharing the same
instrument, test, and either QC lot, if the result is control based, or species, if the
result is patient based.
All QC results associated with the same QC test of a specific QC lot or species
are grouped in a QC population. The QC population maintains statistics of the
values of its contained results.
To contribute to the statistics, QC results must meet the following criteria:
• The result must have a numeric value.
• The result value must be within the range defined by the Ignored deviation
count. Any result value outside the ignored deviation count value is not used
in statistics.
• The result cannot be flagged by an undefined flag or by a flag with a severity
greater than zero.
• The result must not be omitted.
You can see a graphical display of these statistics through the Levey-Jennings
graph.
Populations can be manually or automatically created within the
ADVIA CentraLink software. If you do not manually create populations prior to
processing controls, populations are automatically created upon receipt of the
first QC result for the respective method and control lot being used. If you choose
to have your populations automatically created, you must still manually specify
the target and reference mean and deviation in order for Westgard checks to be
applied and for QC results to affect autovalidation of patient results.

177
 QC populations can be accessed from the main menu, from the Method window,
and from the QC Lot window. When accessed from the main menu or the QC Lot
window, the QC population window displays first.
Access the QC Populations window from the main menu:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality Control > QC
populations.
The QC population query window displays. You can also access the QC
population query window from the QC Lots window by right-selecting a lot
number row and selecting Populations.

Field Description
Test Limits QC data to a specific test. Double-select the field
to select from a list.

178 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Instrument group Limits QC data to a specific instrument group. Double-
select the field to select from a list.
When a value is entered into the Instrument group field,
the Instrument field is disabled.
Instrument Limits QC data to a specific instrument. Double-select
the field to select from a list.
When a value is entered into the Instrument field, the
Instrument group field is disabled.
Type Select one of the following:
• Any – does not restrict the result set to type.
• Control – restricts the result set to populations
referencing a QC lot. Entering a value to the QC Lot
field enables additional restriction to the specified
QC Lot.
• Patient – restricts the result set to moving-average
populations referencing a species. Entering a value
to the Species field enables additional restriction to
the specified species.
QC lot Limits QC data to a specific control lot. Double-select
the field to select from a list.
Species Limits QC data to a specific species. Double-select the
field to select from a list.
MISPL Filter Limits QC data to a specific special function. Double-
select the field to select from a list.
2. To submit the entered criteria, select OK.

179
 The QC Populations browser displays. Depending on the criteria you entered,
this browser displays a range of QC populations.

3. To view the details of one of the listed QC Populations, double-select on any

entry.

180 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The QC Population editor window displays.

Field Description
Method Test Method test identifies the test associated with the
the method to which the population applies.
When inserting a new QC population, first specify
the test with the instrument field unspecified.
Setting the test restricts instrument lookup to only
those instruments that support the test.

181
 Field Description
Method Instrument Method instrument identifies the instrument
associated with the method to which the
population applies.
Moving average Moving average indicates whether this is a patient-
based population.
When selected, this moving average checkbox
specifies that a species, not a QC Lot, is grouped
with the test and instrument within the QC
population.
Target value The target value for the control product.
NOTE:
When setting the target value to assign population
reference values, the specified value should be
within the range of the assay. A reference value
outside the assay range will cause a severity to be
generated for an invalid reference result if a
control result with a comparator (< or >) is
received.
Target Deviation (1SD) The target deviation for the control product.
NOTE: If the manufacturer supplies the deviation
as 2SD, you must divide that number by 2 to
derive the 1SD value.
Cumulative N The number of results for this test that were closed
out.
Current N The number of results for this test that have not
been closed out.

182 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Ignored deviation count If the difference between a new QC result and the
reference value is ≥ the ignored deviation count
times the reference deviation, the new QC result
does not contribute to the population statistics.
Example: QC population for test WBC
Reference value: 3.4
Reference deviation: 0.225
Ignored deviation count: 2.
QC result: 3.9
[3.9 (QC result) - 3.4 (Reference value)] ≥
[2 (Ignored deviation count) * 0.225 (Reference
deviation)].
Last close out time The date and time when the population was last
closed out.
Reference value Used for Westgard checking. This can be set to
either the Target value or the Mean. To set this,
right-select the editor and select Set Reference.
In the Source field, select Target, Current
Statistics, or Cumulative Statistics.
NOTE: Reference values should be defined with
values within the range of the assay. A reference
value outside the assay range will cause a severity
to be generated for an invalid reference result if a
control result with a comparator (< or >) is
received.
Reference deviation Used for Westgard checking. You can set either
the Target deviation or the Standard deviation. To
set this, right-select the editor and select Set
Reference. In the Source field, select Target,
Current Statistics, or Cumulative Statistics.

183
 Viewing QC Results for a Population
View QC results for a population from the Results of QC Population window:
1. Right-select the selected population and select Related > Results.
The Results of QC population window displays. From this window, you can
investigate the date and time the QC was assessed, the QC value, and the
QC severity.

Viewing a Levey-Jennings Graph

View a Levey-Jennings graph from the QC Populations window:
1. Right-select the selected population and select Levey-Jennings graph.

184 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Levey-Jennings graph displays.

About the Levey-Jennings Graph

The Levey-Jennings graph displays all QC results in chronological sequence that
were obtained in the date interval specified using the Since and Until fields.
These QC results are displayed at equidistant X axis intervals.

185
 Levey-Jennings graphs display the following:
• comparator results with a half-open straight line.

• instrument log events associated with an instrument and a method and for
which a QC population exists with a dotted vertical line. Refer to Instrument
Logs‚ page 291.

186 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 NOTE: To prevent legibility issues, limit the amount of text for display on the
Levey-Jennings graph.
You can modify the display, as described in this section.
The graph area is color-coordinated to QC standard deviations (SDs):
• Green band: the green band lies between +/- 2 SD of the reference value.
• Yellow band: the yellow band lies between 2 to 3 SD and -2 to -3 SD of the
reference value.
• Red band: the red band lies above 3 or below -3 SD of the reference value.
Plotting characters are color-coordinated to reflect severity:
• Green plotting dots are for values that have not violated a Westgard rule;
that is, the severity check of a QC result is zero.
• Red plotting dots are for values that have violated a Westgard rule.
• White plotting dots are or values that are omitted.
The default Westgard rules are as follows:

1-2s A control result exceeds the reference value (mean) plus or minus 2 SDs.

1-3s A control result exceeds the reference value mean plus or minus 3 SDs.

2-2s Two consecutive control results fall on the same side of the reference
value mean plus or minus 2 SDs.
4-1s Four consecutive control results fall on the same side of the reference
value mean plus or minus 1 SD.
10-x Ten consecutive control results fall on the same side of the mean and are
within 1 SD of the reference value mean.
R-4s Two consecutive control results that are on opposite sides of the
reference value (mean) plus or minus 2SD apart.
TIP: Rest your mouse on a plotting dot to see detailed information about it.
- X = sequential number of the value
- Y = value of point
- Test

187
 - Assessed time
- Severity
- Cumulative Westgard errors up to that point
The target value and target deviation displayed are values defined on the QC
population window. The cumulative and current N, Mean, SD, and CV%
displayed are the actual calculated statistics.
Change the date interval:
1. Type in a start date in the Since field using the format M/D/YY.
2. Type in an end date in the Until field using the same date format.
3. Select Draw to display the new data for the new date range.
NOTE: Double-selecting either of date fields opens a calendar from which you
can select the date.

The Button Bar on the Levey-Jennings Graph

The Levey-Jennings Graph includes tools that let you modify the graph.
Button Name Description
Print Displays a print window from which you can select
a printer, set print options, and print the graph.
Zoom in Double the zoom factor of the graph.
Zoom out Divide the zoom factor of the graph by 2.
Reset zoom Restore the zoom factor to 1:1.
Free zoom The mouse cursor changes into a magnifying
glass, and if you select somewhere in the drawing
area, the screen is zoomed around that point.
Zoom The mouse cursor changes into a drawing cross
window and you can draw a rectangle on the screen. When
the mouse button is released, the graph is zoomed
to that rectangle.

188 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Button Name Description
Group/split Not applicable in the ADVIA CentraLink system.
the data sets
X options Displays a window where you can set all X axis
options.
Y options Displays a window where the user can set all Y
axis options.
General Displays a window where the user can set all
options general options.
Show/Hide Toggles the display of the legends.
the legend
About Displays the About box.

Exporting QC Populations to Text and XML Files

You can export QC population data as an XML file or as a text file in either the
Bio-Rad point data or summary data format to ensure that the QC data is
recognized by most third party QC software.
You have the ability to select one control population or multiple control
populations at a time for export. All information for a control population, which
includes lot number, expiration date, target, target deviation, and test value, can
be exported in one step.
NOTE: You can group Bio-Rad text formats by instrument, lot number, and test
and, you can sort them by date and time and by lot level.

189
 Access the Export window from the QC Population editor window:
1. Right-select the selected population and select Export.

Field Description
Accessed From Specify the starting time frame from which QC data is
accessed for export.
You can select from the dropdown menu and specify a
date value or choose from among listed relative date
values. By selecting Other, you can customize your
own entry by entering a number, a time interval of day,
week, month, quarter, or year, and by specifying
whether this is in the past or the future.
NOTE: Ensure that the Accessed From value is older
than the Accessed To value. An invalid date range
prevents the successful export of QC data.

190 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Accessed To Specify the ending time frame to which QC data is
accessed for export.
You can select from the dropdown menu and specify a
date value or choose from among listed relative date
values. By selecting Other, you can customize your
own entry by entering a number, a time interval of day,
week, month, quarter, or year, and by specifying
whether this is in the past or the future.
NOTE: Ensure that the Accessed To value is more
recent than the Accessed From value. An invalid date
range prevents the successful export of QC data.
Include omitted If selected, omitted results are exported with the QC
population data.
If not selected, omitted results are not exported with the
QC population data.
Folder Target folder for the output files. The files are named
automatically and includes a prefix, which is dependent
upon the selected Format, and a time stamp.

191
 Field Description
Format Select from the following options:
• XML – All summary data (lot number, expiration
date, target, target deviation, and test value) are
exported at the same time as the point data. An
output file can contain multiple population records
each with multiple result records.
NOTE: If the specified Accessed From value is
more recent than the specified Accessed To value
and you choose XML as the format type, the export
process initiates upon selecting OK, an output file is
created, but the output file does not contain QC
results. No error message displays.
• Bio-Rad point data – Results are output one per line
with the following data per result: Instrument Name,
Lot Number, Test Name, AssessmentDate,
AssessmentTime, Lot Level, QC String Value. Non-
numerical results are skipped.
NOTE: To successfully export data in the Bio-Rad
point data format, a lot level must be specified on
the QC Lots editor window.
NOTE: If the specified Accessed From value is
more recent than the specified Accessed To value
and you choose Bio-Rad point data as the format
type, the following error message displays when
you select OK: Nothing to Export.

192 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Bio-Rad summary data – Bio-Rad summary data is
always generated to cover a period of one month. The
mean, standard deviation, and number of points is
exported as opposed to the QC string value of the point
data. In this format, populations are output one per line,
with the following data per population: Instrument
Name, Lot Number, Test Name, Minimal Assessment
Date, 12:00, Lot Level, Selection Mean, Selection
Standard Deviation, Selection Numeric Count. Non-
numerical results are skipped.

2. To initiate the export, select OK.

Upon export completion, a confirmation message displays.

Evaluating QC Results
You can obtain QC results in the following ways:
• Uploaded directly from instruments. These results are associated with a
method and with a QC lot.
• Calculated from uploaded results. These results are associated with a
method on a calculated test and with a QC lot.
NOTE: To be used in a calculation, input QC results must share instrument,
QC lot, and assessment time.
• Generated by the patient Moving Average algorithm. These results are
associated with a method and with a species.
QC Results have the following three associated severities:
• Westgard severity
• Instrument severity
• Method severity
To investigate a QC issue, you might have to consider several QC populations.
Querying provides you with a comprehensive view of QC results because you
can access results from across different populations, control lots, or species.

193
 Results are displayed on the QC Results (Across controls view) window. You can
also access a specified result set through the QC Results window.

Accessing the QC Results (Across controls view) Window

You can navigate directly to the QC Results (Across controls view) window from
the Review and Edit window, from the QC icon of the QC menu, or from the Start
menu.
When you navigate from Review and Edit, the method and instrument are
preassigned since you navigate from a selected test and instrument.
When navigating from the QC icon or the Start menu, the fields on the QC
Results (Across controls view) window are not populated. When you enter criteria
to the Query Parameters section and select Apply, results matching the entered
criteria display.

QC Result Parsing
QC results with a supported comparator are parsed into a numerical value and a
comparator as is done with patient results.
QC results with a comparator are handled as numeric results and can be
configured to participate in Westgard checking.
Consider the following examples:
• Result sent by instrument is “<0.02”: This value is saved to the database as
QCResult.NumericValue = 0.02, QCResult.StringValue = <0.02 and
QCResult.Comparator = <.
• Result sent by instrument is “>10.0”: This value is saved to the database as
QCResult.NumericValue = 10.0, QCResult.StringValue = >10.0 and
QCResult.Comparator = >.
NOTE: Patient results with an associated comparator, which could be rendered
after applying method detection limits, are not eligible to contribute to the moving
average.

Type Error QC Result

A type error QC result occurs when the type of the result value cannot be
converted to the type of the corresponding test.

194 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

On receipt of an unexpected non-numeric value, the Westgard severity is set to
0, the Method severity is set to the value in the QC severity on type error field on
the Autovalidation tab of the Method window, and Type error checkbox is
selected at the QC Results window.

Invalid Reference QC Result

A QC Result is considered an invalid reference when the QC result numeric value
contains a comparator and the QC result is not definitively on the same side of
the population reference value. The population reference value and reference
deviation must be specified for a QC result to be considered an invalid reference.
On receipt of an unexpected invalid reference QC result with comparator, the
Westgard severity is set to 0, the Method severity is set to the value in the QC
severity on invalid reference field on the Autovalidation tab of the Method
window, and the Invalid reference checkbox is selected at the QC Results
window.
Consider the following example for a QC population with reference value of 0.495
and a reference deviation defined.
• QC result value <0.5 is considered an invalid reference because the actual
value may be on either side of the reference value.
NOTE: It is the reference value rather than the reference deviation that
determines if a result is an invalid reference.
• QC result value <0.1 is not considered an invalid reference because it always
falls on the low side of the reference value.
Although QC results that contain a comparator can be configured to participate in
Westgard checking, these results do not participate in statistics. Accordingly
patient results that contain a comparator do not participate in moving averages.
Levey-Jennings graph displays comparator results with a half-open straight line.
Access the QC Results (Across controls view) window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality control > QC results.
You can also select the QC icon on the toolbar.

195
 The QC Results (Across controls view) window displays.

The QC Results (Across controls view) window is comprised of three areas:

• Query parameters
• Result browser
• Statistics

196 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Query Parameters Area
The Query Parameters area of the QC Results (Across controls view) window
allows for you to enter search criteria that restricts the result set that is displayed
in the result browser area.
Field Description
Test Restricts the result set to those referencing the
specified test. This value also restricts a specified
instrument to those having the specified test
available.
Instrument Restricts the result set to those referencing the
specified instrument. This value also restricts a
specified test to those available on the specified
instrument.
When a value is entered into the Instrument field,
the Instrument group field is disabled.
Instrument group Restricts the result set to those referencing the
specified instrument group.
When a value is entered into the Instrument
group field, the Instrument field is disabled.
From and To From and To values restrict the result set to those
assessed between the specified dates and times.
These fields have the calendar functionality and
time fields.

197
 Field Description
Type The type of control result. The options are as
follows:
• Control – Restricts the result set to those
obtained from QC material, which references
a QC lot.
• Patient – Restricts the result set to only those
obtained from a moving average of patient
results, which references some species.
• Any – No type restriction imposed on the
result set.
Lot Restricts the result set to only those referencing
the specified QC lot.
Species Restricts the result set to those referencing the
specified species.
Include Closed Out Determines whether results that have already
been closed out are included in the result set.
Sort by Determines the relative order of importance of
the following fields for sorting the result set in the
browser: test, instrument, assessment time, and
lot number.
The last sort by value you specify is applied
automatically in your next session.
Select from the following sort by selections:
• Test-Lot-Assessed-Instrument
• Test-Instrument-Assessed-Lot
• Test-Lot-Instrument-Assessed
To initiate the query and populate the result set in the QC Results browser, select
Apply.

198 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Result Browser Area
The Result Browser area of the QC Results (Across controls view) window
displays the results that match the search criteria entered in the Query
Parameters area.

Field Description
Test This column is highlighted when the associated method
is determined to be critical as per processing the result.
Instrument This column is highlighted when the associated method
is determined to be critical as per processing the result.
Lot/Species Either the QC lot or the species displays.
Assessed Date and time the result was processed.
C Contains an asterisk when a comment is associated
with the result. The expanded comment is displayed at
the bottom of the screen when the result is highlighted
in the browser.
String Value This column is highlighted when the associated method
is determined to be critical as per processing the result.
QC results with a supported comparator are parsed into
a numerical value and a comparator as is done with
patient results.
The String Value field contains the complete string:
comparator and numeric value.
The Comparator field contains the comparator; the
Numeric value field contains the numeric value.
F Contains an asterisk when a flag is associated with the
result. The expanded meaning of the flag is displayed
at the bottom of the screen when the result is
highlighted in the browser.

199
 Field Description
MS This Method Severity field value is set to the highest
absolute value of the following QC severities:
• Westgard severity
NOTE: If a QC result has an associated flag and the
instrument flag control severity is greater than zero,
Westgard checks are not performed and no
Westgard severities are applied. In this case, the
Method Severity field value is set to the instrument
flag control severity even if the flag has a lower
severity than the Westgard severity for the violated
Westgard rule.
• QC severity on type error
• QC severity on invalid reference
Type errors occur when the received result value
cannot be converted to the result type of the
corresponding test.
On receipt of an unexpected non-numeric value, the
Westgard severity is set to 0 and the QC severity on
type error is applied.
Invalid reference error occurs when the QC result
numeric value contains a comparator and the QC result
is not definitively on the same side of the population
reference value.
QC results with an associated flag where the
instrument flag control severity is greater than the value
specified within the QC maximal instrument severity
field on the More tab of the system Options window are
automatically omitted.
This MS value can be reset using the Reset Severity
function. See Resetting QC Severity‚ page 205.
See Understanding Color Display in the Result
Browser‚ page 201 for details on color assignments.

200 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Levey-Jennings These columns display the relative position of the value
-3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 with respect to its population's reference value and
reference deviation. Colors have the same meaning as
in the QC Population Levey-Jennings graph:
• The backgrounds between the -2 to +2 deviation
columns display in green.
• The backgrounds between the -2 to -3 deviation
column and between the 2 to 3 deviation column
display in yellow.
• The backgrounds of the -3 deviation column and of
3 deviation column display in red.
The deviation values are represented as either dots or
arrows. Arrows are used for outliers farther than 4SD
from reference. The dots and arrows are either
displayed as solid or outlines. An outlined dot or arrow
is displayed when a result is omitted.

Understanding Color Display in the Result Browser

The method QC severity column (MS) has the same color coding specifications
as the severity columns on the Review and Edit window. The colors differentiate
between different severities assigned to the test results.
Consider the following severity and color coding specifications:
• When the QC severity of the method is 1, the background of the MS column
displays as green. Green signifies moderate severity.
• When the QC severity of the method is 2, the background of the MS column
displays as yellow. Yellow signifies high severity.
• When the QC severity of the method is 3 or greater, the background of the
MS column displays as red. Red signifies severe severity.
When the method QC severity of a QC result exceeds the method QC severity
limit, the following column backgrounds display in red: test, instrument, and string
value.

201
 Red also displays within the Current column of Review and Edit with a type error
QC result or an invalid reference QC result with comparator.
• A type error QC result occurs when the type of the result value cannot be
converted to the type of the corresponding test.
• An invalid reference QC result occurs when a comparator of a numeric result
is inconclusive regarding the relative position of the value with respect to the
population reference value.
When the QC severity exceeds the QC severity limit, the test, instrument, and
string value columns continue to display in red until the QC problem is addressed
and the Reset Severity function is executed.

Statistics Area
The Statistics area of the QC Results (Across controls view) window allows for
you to see population statistics for the QC result selected within the Result
Browser area.
To contribute to the statistics, QC results must meet the following criteria:
• numeric value
• empty comparator field
• not omitted
• exist inside the range defined by the qc population Ignored deviation count

202 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Comment Any comment that has been associated with the
selected control result.
NOTE: When a comparator QC result does not
contribute to Westgard checks, 1 of 2 comments
displays depending on whether the Include
comparator QC results checkbox is selected for
the individual Method on the Method window or
globally on the Setup Westgard window:
• When a QC Result is a comparator result and
the Include comparator QC results checkbox is
not selected, the following comment displays:
"Comparator result; not participating in WG
checks."
• When a QC Result is a comparator result and
the Include comparator QC results checkbox is
selected, but the result is determined to be an
invalid reference, the following comment
displays: "Undefined reference result; not
participating in WG checks."
Either of these additional comments are added to
the existing comments. Neither of these additional
comments is uploaded to the LIS nor is it listed on
reports.
Refer to Westgard Tab‚ page 312.
Flags The expanded meaning associated with the
flagged result displays in the Flag field when the
result is highlighted in the QC Result browser.

203
 Field Description
Target Value The target value of the QC population for the
selected QC result.
NOTE: The evaluation of the QC result for
Westgard checks is performed against the QC
population reference value and deviation and not
the Target value and deviation.
Target Deviation The target deviation value of the QC population for
the selected QC result.
NOTE: The evaluation of the QC result for
Westgard checks is performed against the QC
population reference value and deviation and not
the Target value and deviation.
N The number of QC results contributing to the
statistics of the QC Population of the selected QC
result.
Mean The mean value of the statistics of the QC
Population of the selected QC result.
SD The standard deviation of the statistics of the QC
population of the selected QC result.
CV % The coefficient of variation of the statistics of the
QC population of the selected QC result.
Current This row displays the current statistics of the QC
population of the selected QC result.
Cumulative This row displays the cumulative statistics of the
QC population of the selected QC result.

204 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Date range When a date range is specified in the From / To
fields of the Query Parameters section, this row
displays the statistics of the QC results that
correspond to the entered date and time for the
QC population of the selected QC result.

Statistics Area Button

Resetting QC Severity
The Reset Severity function is initiated when the problem that caused the
method’s QC severity is addressed. Once initiated, the reset severity function
resets the method’s QC severity field to zero and triggers a new QC result action
record that is associated with the QC result record referencing the method.
After the method QC severity of a given QC result exceeds the method QC
severity limit, the test, instrument, and string value columns of all subsequent QC
results remain red until the QC control problem is addressed and the Reset
Severity function is executed.
Once a method displayed in red is highlighted, the Reset Severity button is
selected, and the method QC severity of the new QC result does not exceed the
method QC severity limit, the test and instrument columns no longer display in
red. Instead the columns display with a white background. The string value
column, however, retains the red background as a permanent indication of the
QC result’s method QC severity exceeding the method QC severity limit. The MS
column background also retains the red background.
NOTE: Failure to reset a QC severity to zero results in the continued reporting of
a QC severity error on all subsequent instances of that test on the affected
instrument.

Resetting the QC Severity from the QC Results (Across Controls View)

Window
Reset the QC severity from the QC Results (Across controls view) window:
1. Select the Reset Severity button.

205
 The Reset QC Severity window displays and is automatically populated with
the Instrument and Test value of the QC result highlighted in the QC Results
browser and is the instrument and test reference for the method for which you
are clearing the severity.

2. Enter a comment.
3. Select OK.
NOTE: The change is not automatically reflected in the QC Results (Across
Controls View) window. To display the reset severity, press F5 to refresh the
window or close the window and reopen it.

Resetting the QC Severity from the Instruments Browser

1. Select the Instruments icon on the toolbar.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Right-select the selected instrument that has the associated QC severity that
you want to reset and select Related > Tests.
3. Select the test that has the associated QC severity you want to reset.
4. Right-select the selected test and select Reset QC Severity.
5. Enter a comment and select OK.
The QC severity of the selected test on the selected instrument is reset to
zero.

206 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Right-Selecting Functions
Viewing QC Results
You can access the result record of any QC result that displays in the QC Result
browser. The result record provides detail information on result values, severity
flags and includes the following tabs: Failed Westgard checks, Comments.
You can access the QC Results window from the QC Results (Across controls
view) section and from the QC Population window.
To access the QC Results window from the QC Results (Across controls view)
section:
1. Double-select a QC result.
To access the QC Results window from the QC Population editor window:
1. Right-select at the QC Population editor window and select Related >
Results.
2. At the Results of QC Population window, double-select a QC Result.

207
 The QC Result window displays with the Failed Westgard Checks tab
selected.

Field Description
Population QC lot The QC Lot value indicates that the result is part of a
control population. Specifies the QC lot from which the
result was obtained.
Population species The species value indicates that the result is part of a
patient moving average population.
Assessment time The date and time when either a control-based, QC lot
result was assessed on the instrument or a patient-
based, moving average result was generated.

208 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
String value The string representation of the result value. It can
contain non-numeric QC values.
Numeric value The numeric representation of the result value.
Type Error The checkbox is automatically selected when a type
error QC result occurs.
Type error QC results occur when the type of the result
value cannot be converted to the Control data type of
the corresponding test.
Invalid reference The checkbox is automatically selected when an invalid
reference QC result with comparator occurs.
Invalid reference QC result occurs when the
comparator of a numeric result is inconclusive
regarding the relative position of the value to the
population reference value. The term “invalid reference”
suggests that the comparator was used with a numeric
value that could be interpreted as a result that may be
on either side of the population reference value.
Westgard severity Determined by the severity assigned to the Westgard
check that was violated for this result. The severities
are assigned in the Westgard setup sub-tab of the
Advanced tab of the Method window.
NOTE: If a QC result has an associated flag and the
control severity that was defined for that flag is greater
than zero, Westgard checks are not performed and no
Westgard severities are applied even if the flag has a
lower severity than the Westgard severity for the
violated Westgard rule.
See Configuring Instrument Tests (Methods) and Flags‚
page 300 and Configuring Westgard Rules‚ page 315.

209
 Field Description
Method severity The Method severity is the highest QC severity
received on a result since the last QC reset. A QC
result severity is determined by the highest absolute
value of either the Westgard severity, the instrument
severity, the QC severity on type error fields. If the QC
severity of a result exceeds the current method
severity, this value is copied into the Method severity
field.
NOTE: If a QC result has an associated flag and the
control severity that was defined for that flag is greater
than zero, Westgard checks are not performed and no
Westgard severities are applied, even if the flag has a
lower severity than the Westgard severity for the
violated Westgard rule.
See Configuring Instrument Tests (Methods) and Flags‚
page 300.

210 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Instrument severity Automatically set to the highest severity of the
associated control severity instrument flags.
If a result has an associated flag and that flag's control
severity is greater than zero, the result is automatically
excluded from Westgard checks. For results with an
associated flag and the flag's control severity is greater
than zero and higher than the value specified in the QC
maximal instrument severity field on the More tab of the
system Options window, these results are automatically
omitted and excluded from the population’s current
statistics.
NOTE: If the instrument severity flag is not relevant to
QC results, set the Control severity at the Instrument
Flag window to 0. If the instrument severity flag is
relevant to QC results, set the Control severity at the
Instrument Flag window to equal the highest value of
the Westgard rules applicable to that method.
If an unknown flag is received, the field value is set to
-5.
See Setting Instrument Flags‚ page 300.
Omitted The checkbox is automatically selected when a result is
omitted.
Uploaded The checkbox is automatically selected when the result
is uploaded to the LIS.

211
 Field Description
Reagent information When a QC result is received from an instrument and
ADVIA CentraLink driver that support the upload of
reagent information, the reagent information is saved
directly to this field
The reagent information can consist of the reagent lot
number, reagent expiration date, and the reagent
sequence number.
The reagent information value stored in this field can
also be inherited from the Reagent information field of
the Method; however, reagent information received at
the result level has priority over global reagent
information stored at the Method.
If the Reagent information field on the LIS 2 tab at the
systems Option window is enabled, result specific
reagent information is uploaded to the LIS.
1-2s, 1-3s, 10-x, 2-2s, If selected, the check boxes indicate the available
4-1s, R-4s Westgard checks that the result failed.

212 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Comment tab consists of the following fields:

Field Description
Instrument comment Comment received with the result from the instrument.
Parse comment Comment generated by the system. Parse comments
are comments separated by commas.
User comment Free flow text area.

Accessing QC Result Flags

Access the QC Results Flags window from the QC Results (Across controls view)
window:

213
 1. Right-select the selected QC result and select Related > Flags.
The Flags of QC result browser window displays.

2. To populate the QC Result Flag window, double-select on an entry.

214 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The QC result flag displays.

Field Description
QC result population References the applicable QC lot.
QC lot
QC result population References the applicable species.
species
QC result assessment References the date and time that the result was
time accessed.
Instrument flag References the instrument flag defined on the
instrument.

Interpreting Non-Numeric QC Results

You can store and save non-numeric QC results. They are not eligible for
Westgard checking. These non-numeric QC results are excluded automatically
from the population’s current statistics. Upon this exclusion, an automatic action
comment is generated, for example “Auto omit of non-numeric result by
‘sysman’.”
NOTE: You do not have the ability to re-instate the non-numeric QC results.
Non-numeric QC results are assigned the QC severity on type error configured
for the method unless the QC data type is defined as string.

215
 Non-numeric QC results are excluded from the statistics but they are not auto
omitted.
In the QC Results (Across controls view) window, non-numeric results are not
assigned a point in the Levey-Jennings -3 to +3 fields.

Omitting a QC Data Point

You can omit individual QC data points from the Current data set. Omitted data
points are not included in the QC statistics (N, Mean, SD, and CV).
NOTE: You cannot omit a data point that has already been closed out. Data
points that were uploaded cannot be omitted. Data points that were calculated
cannot be omitted.
1. In the QC Results (Across Controls View) window, display the QC information
for the data point that you want to omit.
See Accessing the QC Results (Across controls view) Window‚ page 194 for
detailed instructions.
2. Select the data point that you want to omit.
3. Right-select the selected data point and select Omit.
4. In the Omit window, enter a comment.
A comment is mandatory whenever you omit a result.
5. Select OK.

Reinstating an Omitted QC Data Point

1. In the QC Results (Across Controls View) window, display the QC information
for the data point that you want to reinstate.
2. Select the data point that you want to reinstate.
3. Right-select the selected data point and select Reinstate.
4. In the Omit window, enter a comment.
A comment is not mandatory to reinstate a result.
5. Select OK.

216 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Auditing a QC Data Point
You can see a record of all actions that were taken on a QC data point.
1. In the QC Results (Across Controls View) window, display the QC information
for the data point you want to audit.
2. Select the data point that you want to audit.
3. Right-select the selected data point and select Related > Actions.
The Actions on QC Results browser window displays all actions that were
taken on the selected data point.

Adding a Comment to a QC Data Point

You can add a comment to a QC data point.
1. In the QC Results (Across Controls View) window, display the QC information
for the data point you want to comment on.
2. Select the data point about which you want to comment.
3. Right-select the selected data point and select Edit Comment.
4. Enter the comment you want and then select Update.
The comment text displays in the Comment field at the bottom of the window.

Uploading QC Results to the LIS

You can upload control-based QC data to the LIS. By default this upload is by
population. You can configure it to upload by lot.
QC results associated with the QC lot that were not uploaded before are
uploaded. The upload message has the same structure as a sample result
upload. With the QC upload, however, the sample ID is replaced with the QC lot
number.
Upload to the LIS is intended primarily for archiving purposes. Any LIS intending
to perform its own QC checking on data received from the ADVIA CentraLink
system must take into account that data is uploaded in batches, not in real time,
as they come in from the instruments. The upload to the LIS is a batch-enabled
process. QC upload messages typically contain many results for the same test,
each identified with an instrument and an assessment time stamp.

217
 Upload QC results by lot to the LIS from the QC lots window:
1. Right-select the selected lot and select Upload results.
The Upload results window displays.

Field Description
Max Days Specifies the maximum number of days back from the
current day from which to collect results.This value
limits the size of upload messages. If left unspecified,
no day limit applies.
NOTE: If this is the very first time that QC data are
being uploaded, select 1 for 1 day in the Max Days field
to limit the amount of QC data uploaded to the LIS and
to avoid impacting communication with a large amount
of data at one time.
Include not closed out If selected, QC results that are not closed out are
eligible for upload.
If not selected, QC results that are not closed out are
not eligible for upload.

218 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Group message by lot If selected, a single message containing all eligible QC
results associated with the QC lot is sent to the LIS.
If not selected, separate messages for each QC
population are sent to the LIS.
NOTE: If the number of results in one single message is
greater than 10000 results, selecting this checkbox and
thereby grouping the QC result upload on a single
message can impact communication performance. If
this is the very first time that QC data are being
uploaded, the recommendation is to group by QC
Population.

Closing Out QC
Performing the QC Close Out procedure removes all QC data from the Current
QC calculations and includes the closed-out data in the Cumulative QC
calculations.

Closing Out QC for All Instruments

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality Control > QC Close Out.
The following message displays: “Do you want to close out all the Daily QC?”
2. Select Yes.

Closing Out QC for a Single Instrument

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instrument browser window displays.
2. Select the instrument that you want to close out.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select QC Close Out.
The following message displays: “Do you want to close out all the Daily QC?”
4. Select Yes.

219
 Importing ADVIA 120/2120 QC Data
1. Place the ADVIA 120/2120 QC floppy disk into the disk drive.
2. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality Control > ADVIA 120 QC
Configuration Import.
The ADVIA 120 QC Import window displays.

3. Double-select the Data file field to specify the data file name.
The Control file field is automatically populated. Do not change this value.
4. Optionally you can enter the Name of the supplier and a Description.
5. Double-select the Instrument field and select from the list.
6. Select OK.

Generating QC Reports
You can generate the following QC reports:
• QC lots
• QC populations
• QC results

220 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Generating QC Lot Reports
The QC Lot Reports window allows you to generate text or HTML reports on QC
populations by lot.
Data in the heading section of the generated report consists of the name of the
QC lot and can include current, cumulative, and date range statistics.
When the From and To date range parameters are specified on the Reports
window, the current, cumulative, and date range statistics are displayed in the
report heading.
When the From and To date range parameters are not specified on the Reports
window, no date range is displayed in the heading and the current and cumulative
statistics are displayed at the bottom of the report.
Generate a QC Lot report from the QC Lot window:
1. Right-select the selected lot and select Report.
The Report window displays.

221
 Field Description
Format Select HTML or Text.
The text format requires a line width of up to 132
characters. Ensure that your Windows font or page
orientation settings are properly set to avoid text
wrapping.
Graphs are available in HTML format only. The graphs
might not display properly when scrolling during
preview.
Instrument The instrument from which you want to include QC
populations in the report.
When a value is entered into the Instrument field, the
Instrument group field is disabled.
Instrument group The instrument group from which you want to include
QC populations in the report.
When a value is entered into the Instrument group field,
the Instrument field is disabled.
From and To Delimit the from and to dates and time. Only QC results
assessed within the specified time frame are used in
the report.
You can enter a range of dates and times or you can
select the dates from the Calendar window.
Entering a date range determines whether current,
cumulative, and report statistics are displayed in the
report heading.
Sort by Select Instrument or Test.
The Sort by field determines the sequencing of the QC
populations displayed in the report.
Preview If selected, a preview of the report is displayed on
screen prior to printing.

222 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Printer The printer to which the output of the report is directed.

Generating QC Population Reports

The QC Populations Reports window enables you to generate text or HTML
reports on QC populations.
You can generate a QC Population report containing Levey-Jennings graphs, and
you can direct its output to screen or to a printer. You can run the report on a
selection of more than one population at once.
The header section of the report includes Target value, Target deviation, and
From and To date range when the From and To date range parameters are
specified on the Report window.
The N, Mean, SD and CV% statistics are displayed for Date range, Current, and
Cumulative. When a date range is not specified on the Report window, the Date
Range statistics fields are bland. Depending on the close out data, the Current
and Cumulative statistics fields could be blank.
In the graph section, the background colors are displayed as follows:
• The backgrounds between the -2 to +2 deviation columns display in green.
• The backgrounds between the -2 to -3 deviation column and between the 2 to
3 deviation column displays in yellow.
• The backgrounds of the -3 deviation column and of 3 deviation column
displays in red.
The deviation values are represented as either dots or arrows. Arrows are used
for outliers farther than 4SD from reference. The dots and arrows are either
displayed as solid or outlines. An outlined dot or arrow is displayed when a result
is omitted.
In the bottom, tabular section, the comment column contains result comments
and action comments like Omit and Reinstate. When applicable, the comments
are expanded.
Generate a QC Population report from the QC Population window:
1. Right-select the selected population and select Report.

223
 The Report window displays.

Field Description
Format Select HTML or Text.
The text format requires a line width of up to 132
characters. Ensure that your Windows font or page
orientation settings are properly set to avoid text
wrapping.
Graphs are available in HTML format only. The graphs
might not display properly when scrolling during
preview.
From and To Delimit the from and to dates and time. Only QC results
assessed within the specified time frame are used in
the report.
You can enter a range of dates and times or you can
select the dates from the Calendar window.

224 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Sort by Select Instrument or Test.
The Sort by field determines the sequencing of the QC
populations displayed in the report.
Preview If selected, a preview of the report is displayed on
screen prior to printing.
Printer The printer to which the output of the report is directed.

Generating QC Result Reports

You can generate a QC report using the generic print function.
This generic print function generates simple multiple-record text reports with
dynamic content that is applicable to the selected records.
Generate a QC Result report:
1. At the menu bar, select Record > Print.
The online report displays.

225
Manually Entering a Result
Manual result entry is available when you must enter results from a non-
connected instrument.
Access the Result entry window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Result entry.
You can also select the Result entry icon on the toolbar.
The Result entry window displays.

226 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Instrument The instrument on which the tests are scheduled.
Double-select the ? symbol of the Instrument field to
display a list of instruments.
When an instrument is selected, the Test selection area
below the Test field is automatically populated with the
tests defined on the instrument.
Worklist When an instrument value populates the instrument
field and you double-select the ? symbol of the Worklist
field, the worklists for the associated instrument display
in the Worklists for instrument browser window.
Upon double-selecting a worklist, the selected worklist
value populates the Worklist field and all of the samples
associated with this worklist are listed and display in the
Sample selection area below the Sample ID field.
Create new If selected, the tests and samples selected on this
window will be stored as a new worklist for the selected
instrument.
Test The tests scheduled to the instrument.
If you double-select the ? symbol of the Test field, the
tests defined for the associated instrument display in
the Test browser window. Upon double-selecting a test,
the selected test value populates the test field.
Test selection area Displays the tests defined to the instrument.
When an instrument value populates the Instrument
field, the Test selection area is automatically populated
with the tests defined on the instrument.
Within this area, you can select the applicable tests.
To delete a test from the list, select the test and select
Clear.

227
 Field Description
Clear To clear the Test selection list area, select Clear.
Sample list Select Sample list to enable sample lookup in the
Sample ID field.
Sample ID Double-select to display a list of samples. Select a
sample ID, then OK. Repeat as needed to select more
samples.
Clear button Select to clear the selection in the Sample ID field.
Collected from / to Double-select to display a calendar or enter a date and
time interval to limit the samples selected in MM/DD/YY
format.
Max samples Enter a number to set the maximum number of entries
in the Result Entry window.
Grid type The style in which the result entry grid displays:
• Standard - All selected tests display next to each
other.
• Tiled - New rows are automatically added within the
associated area when the number of tests exceeds
the space allotted for one row of tests.
• Dynamic - Each test displays vertically. The test
name displays next to the associated result.

2. Select OK.

228 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Result entry window displays.
NOTE: The Result entry display type depends on the Grid type selected. You
cannot invert selection in grid mode. The entire grid is always selected.

3. To move to any cell, press TAB.

4. Type in the appropriate value in each cell.
After you enter a value and press TAB, the value becomes read-only.
Continue until all values are entered.
5. Select Close.

Printing a Worklist
1. At the Result entry grid display, select Print from the tool bar or select the
Print icon.
The Worklist printing window displays.
Field Description
Report type The generated worklist can be of the following types:
Full - All rows and columns of the worklist display.
Rows - Only rows of the worklist display.
Columns - Only columns of the worklist display.
Printer Reference to the printer to which the generated worklist
is output.

229
 Field Description
Set as default If selected, the specified Report Type is saved as the
default.
Preview If selected, a preview of the worklist is displayed on
screen prior to printing.

230 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Manually Entering a Workorder
The ADVIA CentraLink system allows you to enter test orders manually to create,
supplement and correct workorders:
• Create a new workorder.
• Supplement the order entry process from the LIS. You can order requests by
panel (battery/Profile) or as a a single test.
• Correct a workorder.

Creating a New Workorder

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Order entry.
You can also select the Order entry icon on the toolbar.

231
 The Order Entry window displays.

2. Type the Sample ID.

The ADVIA CentraLink software supports Sample IDs with a maximum of 16
characters.
NOTE: Use caution when using sample ID values consisting of 16 uppercase
alpha characters. While the sample ID is accepted by the ADVIA CentraLink
software, the 15th and 16th, uppercase, alpha characters display as if they
were truncated in the ADVIA CentraLink software. Upon subsequent retrieval
of the sample ID at the Sample browser window, the 16th character does not

232 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 display, and at the Review and Edit window, both the 15th and 16th
characters do not display. For example, if you enter a sample ID value of
“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP," the sample ID value "ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO"
would display at the Sample browser window and the sample ID value
"ABCDEFGHIJKLMN" would display at the Review and Edit window.
You can enlarge the size of the Sample browser window or Review and Edit
window to increase the Sample ID field and display the full Sample ID value.
For information on resizing windows in the ADVIA CentraLink software, refer
to Using the Workspace‚ page 22.
NOTE: The Sample ID value originates from the LIS, the barcode on the
container, or the Order Entry form. Mandatory field entry.
3. Enter the tests that you are ordering in Requests. Mandatory field.
If... Then...
you know the code or mnemonic for you can enter it directly and press
a test ENTER to add it to the list. You can also
enter a list of known codes separated by
commas and press ENTER.
If you want to enter tests from a list double-select the Requests field to open
the Requestables browser.
Each test mnemonic is listed as Smp
(simple) or Pan (panel) in the Type
column to indicate that it is a single test
or a group of tests. To limit the display to
simple or panel display, select Options
and select the type.
you want to learn more about a test select the test on the Requestables
before ordering it window and right-select to display
additional information.
you want to enter a single test on the double-select the test line on the
order Requestables window.

233
 If... Then...
you want to enter multiple tests select each test and press the
SPACEBAR.
Select OK to transfer the selected list to
the Order Entry editor. When a test is
selected, the leftmost column displays a
> character.

NOTE: Sample ID and Requests are the only required fields on the window.
NOTE: If a test name that consists of 20 characters was entered at the Test
window, the test name value appears to be truncated in the Requests field at
the Order Entry window. To verify the entire test name, put your cursor in the
Requests field and press the right arrow key until each of the remaining
characters of the test name display. Avoid entering test names that consist of
20 characters.
4. Enter the Collection D/T.
If the Collection Date and Time values are specified, these values are
automatically populated in the Collection D/T field for the next manual work
order. You can override or clear the value in the Collection D/T field, however,
for each new manual work order created. Once the Order Entry window is
closed, the value in the Collection D/T field is cleared.
5. Double-select Sample types to display a list of sample types.
6. Double-select Container type to display a list of container types.
7. Double-select Patient ID to display a list of patients.
8. At the list of patients, double-select the appropriate patient to enter patient
information on the order in most of the remaining fields.
NOTE: If the patient is not on the list, you can manually add the new patient
information. When you select OK to submit the order, the system prompts
whether you want to create the new patient record. If a patient record already
exists with the Patient ID that you are specifying, a popup window prompts
you to confirm whether you want to update the patient record. If you select
Yes, the patient record is updated and all sample records that reference the
patient record are updated. If you select No because you do not want to

234 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 update the patient records, a message window prompts that the specified
patient data conflicts with stored patient data. Select OK.
NOTE: Depending on the size setting in use for the Review and Edit window,
the patient name may not display in full. To display the full patient name either
enlarge the size of the Review and Edit window or right-select on the request
and select Related > Patient.
9. Double-select Patient location to select from a list of patient locations.
NOTE: The Encounter field is reserved for future use.
10. Select the More tab to add a comment about the order.
11. Select OK.
If the manual work order you submit has the same sample ID as another work
order, the system displays a duplicate sample ID warning. If the manual work
order you submit has the same sample ID as another work order and that work
order is unsolicited and was received from an instrument rather than the LIS, the
ADVIA CentraLink system displays a message that you can merge the orders. In
this case, select the Merge button on the Order Entry window.
NOTE: When you select OK or Merge to submit an order, the Order Entry
window remains open to accept another order. To close the window, select
Cancel.
If you entered a new patient record for the work order, the system prompts you on
whether to create the new patient record. If you select Yes, the patient record is
updated and all sample records in the ADVIA CentraLink database that reference
the patient record are updated. If you select No, the patient record is not updated.

Merging a New Test into an Existing Workorder

1. Select the Order entry icon.
2. Type the Sample ID.
3. Enter the tests that you are ordering in Requests.
4. To merge sample results with an unmatched workorder, select Merge.
The system merges the two orders.

235
 Ratio and Component Tests Ordered Manually
A ratio test is a test whose result is calculated from the results of other test
results. A component test is a test whose result can be used in the result
calculation of a ratio test. A test is set up as a ratio test by your administrator. An
example of a ratio test that could be defined is HCT, where RBC and MCV are the
component tests used to calculate the ratio test.
If you order a ratio test manually, the component tests are automatically ordered.
You can also manually order a component test only.
If you delete a component test from the order, the ratio test is automatically
deleted.
If you delete a ratio test from the order, the component tests remain in the order.

Updated LAS Information Uploaded to Fields on LAS Tab

After the workorder information is downloaded to the LAS, the sample completes
processing the tests of its workorder, and the sample tube routes to cold storage,
the LAS status fields of the LAS tab of the Order Entry window are automatically
populated with location information.

236 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

The SeqNo field is populated with the sequence number of the LAS system that
uploaded the LAS information.

237
Accessing Patient Records
Depending on the security parameters defined by your administrator, you could
have limited access to patient information.
1. At the menu bar select Start > Routine > Patients > By birth date / By ID /
By Lastname, Firstname.
You can also select the Patients icon on the tool bar.
The Patients browser window displays.
2. Double-select a patient to access the Patient editor window.
The Patients editor window displays.
3. Modify information in the editor and select OK.
NOTE: Depending on the size setting in use for the Review and Edit window,
the patient name may not display in full. To display the full patient name either
enlarge the size of the Review and Edit window or right-select on the request
and select Related > Patient.

238 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Accessing Physician Records
1. At the menu bar select Start > Routine > Physicians > By ID / By
Lastname, Firstname.
You can also select the Physicians icon on the toolbar. The Physicians
browser window displays.
2. Double-select a physician to open the Physician editor window.
The Physician editor window displays.

Field Description
Physician ID Identification number that uniquely identifies the
physician.
Last name, First name, Physician name and address information.
Title, Address

239
 Field Description
Phone The phone number at which the physician can be
reached.
Fax The fax number to which reports, which are Via fax
enabled as specified at the Report window, can be sent.
NOTE: This fax number value serves as the default to
which files are sent when the Via fax checkbox at the
Report window is selected. Refer to Generating a
Sample Report‚ page 86.
Report model The name of the template in which the physician report
is based.
Language The language used when printing reports for samples
for this physician.

Selecting a Report Format for a Physician

Requesting physicians may have different report preferences. You can respond
to these preferences by associating a specific report model with a physician
name. When such an association is made, the report model is used whenever a
workorder contains the physician’s name.
1. In the Physicians browser window, double-select a physician.
The Physician editor window displays.
2. Double-select in the Report model field.
The Report models window displays.
NOTE: Report models are initially configured by your system administrator.
3. Double-select the report model name in the Report models browser window
that you want associated with the physician.
The name of the selected report model displays in the Report model field.
For information on configuring a report model, see Configuring a Report
Model‚ page 328.
4. Select OK.

240 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 System Configuration

Section 3:System Configuration

Configuring Test Settings ..................................................................243
Adding a Test Definition ...............................................................243
Defining Test Groups ....................................................................261
Adding a Test to a Test Group .....................................................262
Editing a Test Definition ...............................................................262
Deleting a Test Definition .............................................................262
Setting a Test Unit .........................................................................263
Assigning a Unit to a Test ............................................................265
Setting a Dimension for a Unit .....................................................266
Setting Result Choices .................................................................267
Setting Test Norms .......................................................................269
Setting Delta Norms ......................................................................272
Defining Test Aspects ...................................................................276
Creating Panels for Requestables ...............................................276
Deleting a Panel .............................................................................278
Adding Tests to Requestables .....................................................279
Defining Instruments ..........................................................................280
Understanding Instrument Types ................................................286
Instrument Logs ............................................................................291
Instrument Setup Targeting .........................................................293
Instrument Retarget Function ......................................................294
Configuring Moving Average Batch Size for an Instrument .....295
Enabling Moving Average for a Method ......................................295
Setting up QC Populations for Moving Average Data ...............295
Creating or Modifying Instrument Groups .......................................298

241
 Configuring Instrument Tests (Methods) and Flags .......................300
Setting Instrument Flags ..............................................................300
Setting Instrument Tests (Methods) ............................................302
Configuring Westgard Rules ........................................................315
Method Setup Targeting Function ...............................................319
Setting Up Coding Systems ...............................................................320
Using Coding Systems .................................................................320
Setting Up a Test Code .................................................................320
Setting up a Sample Type Code ...................................................321
Setting Up a Container Type Code ..............................................322
Setting Up a Species Code ...........................................................323
Defining Sample Sources .............................................................324
Setting Up a Sample Source Code ..............................................325
Configuring Patient Locations ..........................................................327
Configuring a Report Model ..............................................................328
Defining Print Commands ..................................................................331

242 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Configuring Test Settings
This section describes how to add a new test and how to configure the
ADVIA CentraLink system settings for the following items:
• Units (standard measures)
• Dimensions (standard measures)
• Requestables (tests or panels that can be selected for a workorder)
• Delta Norms (delta checking)
• Norms (range checking)
• Result choices (alternatives for test results)
The Tests browser window displays the tests that are defined in the
ADVIA CentraLink system.

Adding a Test Definition

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests > By name.
You can also select the Tests icon on the toolbar.

243
 The Tests browser window displays.

244 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

2. To access the Test editor window, select the New icon.

The Test editor window displays with the Basic tab activated.
Field Description
Name A unique identifier for the test
Upon entering a change to the Name field, a message
displays warning that modifying the Name of the test
does not modify the corresponding requestable name.
If necessary, update the Name of the corresponding
requestable
NOTE: Do not enter a test name value of 20 characters
or more. While the test name is accepted by the
ADVIA CentraLink software, the test name value
appears to be truncated when it displays at the Order
Entry and Review and Edit windows.

245
 Field Description
Sample type Whole blood, serum, plasma, or other.
Upon entering a change to the Sample type field, a
message displays warning that modifying the Sample
type can affect how the test is processed at the
instrument.
Description Description of the test.
Group Reference to the Test Group, which represents the
name of the group into which tests are organized.
Patient data type The acceptable patient data type values that apply to
patients results include the following:
• Numeric - Numeric results are expressed in a given
Control Unit and can be used in numerical
computation; for example, in comparisons against
normal ranges and statistics.
• String
• Enumerated - Enumerated results must match one
of a fixed set of result choices, for example, +, ++,
+++.
• Image - Image results can reference image data on
the file system.
• Complex result values are composed of individual
pieces of arbitrary labeled information, which allows
for loss-less forwarding from the instrument to the
LIS. You cannot view or edit these result values.
• Graph - Electrophoresis results can display online
as graphical representations and can be printed on
sample reports of type HTML.
• NOTE: While electrophoresis is supported, the
functionality is not currently used in the
ADVIA CentraLink software.

246 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Control data type The acceptable control data type values that apply to
QC results include the following:
• Numeric - Numeric results are expressed in a given
Patient Unit and can be used in numerical
computation; for example, in comparisons against
normal ranges and statistics.
• String
• Enumerated - Enumerated results must match one
of a fixed set of result choices, for example, +, ++,
+++.
• Image - Image results can reference image data on
the file system.
• Complex result values are composed of individual
pieces of arbitrary labeled information, which allows
for loss-less forwarding from the instrument to the
LIS. You cannot view or edit these result values.
The complex datatype allows for composite data
support, which makes it possible to receive, store,
and transmit microbiological culture and sensitivity
data as well as blood transfusion data.
• Graph - Electrophoresis results can display online
as graphical representations and can be printed on
sample reports of type HTML.
• NOTE: While electrophoresis is supported, the
functionality is not currently used in the
ADVIA CentraLink software.

247
 Field Description
Patient unit Reference to the unit in which the patient results of
numeric tests are expressed.
WARNING: The units of measure for a given test must
be defined identically at the LIS, in the
ADVIA CentraLink software, and at the instruments.
The units for test results uploaded from the instrument
are not read by the ADVIA CentraLink software. You
must predefine the units for tests in the
ADVIA CentraLink software to match the units for tests
on the instrument. If units of measure of results are
manually changed on an instrument, you must change
the units of measure for the test in the
ADVIA CentraLink software at that time. In addition,
you must purge all existing results for the test from the
ADVIA CentraLink software. Units of measure are not
uploaded to the LIS from the ADVIA CentraLink
software.
Control unit Reference to the unit in which the QC results of
numeric tests should be expressed.
Alternate unit Set an alternate unit if the unit used in the
ADVIA CentraLink software is different from the one
reported by the instrument.
Upon entering a change to the Alternate unit field, a
message displays warning that modifying the Alternate
unit can affect the reporting of new results.
Unit coefficient Coefficient (factor) for converting from the standard to
the alternate unit.
Upon entering a change to the Unit coefficient field, a
message displays warning that modifying the Unit
Coefficient can affect the reporting of new results.

248 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Unit term Constant required to convert from the standard to the
alternate unit.
Upon entering a change to the Unit term field, a
message displays warning that modifying the Unit term
can affect the reporting of new results.
Seq no Sequence number. Used to define the sequence of the
tests on reports and on the Review and Edit window.
Sequence numbers do not have to be unique or
consecutive.
Patient reported The number of decimal places used to represent
decimals patient results on the Current column of the Review and
Edit window, on reports, and that is uploaded to the LIS
is configurable.
For new tests, the default value is the ? symbol.
NOTE: The ? symbol in this field means that the
ADVIA CentraLink software will display exactly the
same number of decimal places uploaded from the
instrument up to and including 9 decimal places.
Upon entering a change to the Patient reported
decimals field, a message displays warning that
reported decimals of a numeric test can round both new
and existing patient results.
If you enter a value less than 2, a message displays
warning that the result could be rounded. You must
confirm that the value you want to enter is less than 2.
The ADVIA CentraLink software stores the result as it is
received from the instrument. This result value
populates the Prev Run column of the Review and Edit
window and this value is not rounded.
If the Prev Run value is reverted, this value will be
rounded before populating the Current column of the
Review and Edit window.

249
 Field Description
Control reported The number of decimals used to represent instrument,
decimals patient moving average, and calculated QC results is
configurable. The Control reported decimal value
determines the number of decimals to which the QC
result is rounded.
Upon entering a change to the Control reported
decimals field, a message displays warning that
reported decimals of a numeric test can round both new
and existing QC results.
If you enter a value less than 2, a message displays
warning that the precision level of QC results being
registered will be reduced.
For instrument QC results, refer to Affects of Control
Reported Decimals on Instrument QC Results‚
page 250.
For patient moving average QC results, refer to Affects
of Control Reported Decimals on Patient Moving
Average Results‚ page 253.
For calculated QC results, refer to Affects of Control
Reported Decimals on Calculated QC Results‚
page 254.

Affects of Control Reported Decimals on Instrument QC Results

Numeric Value
The numeric value of the instrument QC result is always the value received from
the instrument. You can view the numeric value on the detailed QC Result
window. To open the detailed QC Result window to view the numeric value,
double-select a QC result on the QC Results (Across controls view). You can also
view the numeric value in the Levy Jennings graph.
NOTE: The exception is when more than 9 decimals are received from the
instrument. Under this circumstance, the numeric QC result value is rounded to 9
decimal places.
String Value

250 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• Control reported decimal default value (?)
For QC results, the default value is the ? symbol.
If the ? symbol populates the Control reported decimals field for instrument
QC results, the decimal precision of the instrument QC result displayed in the
String Value column on the QC Across Controls View window is the same as
that of the result value received from the instrument.
NOTE: The exception is when more than 9 decimals are received from the
instrument. Under this circumstance, the numeric QC result value is rounded
to 9 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (0-1)
If you enter a Control reported decimals value less than 2, a message
displays warning that the result could be rounded. You must confirm that you
want to enter a value less than 2.
When a Control reported decimals value of 0-1 is entered, the displayed
value in the String Value column is rounded to the specified number of
decimals: 0 or 1.
• Control reported decimal value (2-9)
When a Control reported decimals value of 2-9 is entered, the displayed
value in the String Value column is rounded to the specified number of
decimals: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
Mean and SD
When the Control reported decimal value is set to 0, 1, or the ? symbol, the
displayed value of the Mean and SD fields on the QC Across Controls View
window is 2 decimal places.
When the Control reported decimal value is between 2 and 9 inclusive, the
displayed decimal precision of the Mean and SD fields is the specified number of
decimal places.
Target Value and Target Deviation
On the QC Across Controls View window, the Target value and Target Deviation
value are displayed as entered without rounding.
Upload to LIS
Upon QC Result upload, the Control reported decimal value determines the
number of decimals to which the QC result is rounded.

251
 • Control reported decimal default value (?)
When the ? symbol populates the Control reported decimals field for
instrument QC results, the decimal precision of the instrument QC result
uploaded to the LIS is the same as the decimal precision received from the
instrument. No rounding occurs except when more than 9 decimals are
received from the instrument. Under this circumstance, the numeric QC result
value is rounded to 9 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (0)
When you enter a Control reported decimals value of 0, the decimal precision
of the instrument QC result uploaded to the LIS is 0 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (1)
When you enter a Control reported decimals value of 1, the decimal precision
of the instrument QC result uploaded to the LIS is 1 decimal place.
• Control reported decimal value (2-9)
When a Control reported decimals value of 2-9 is entered, the decimal
precision of the instrument QC result uploaded to the LIS is the specified
number of decimals: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.

Control Numeric Across Mean/SD Levy BioRad Sent to

Reported Value Control Jennings Data LIS
Decimal (String (Y value)
Value)

? * * 2 2 * *
0 * 0 2 2 0 0
1 * 1 2 2 1 1
2-9 * 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2–9
* = whatever value comes from the Instrument
Table 1: Decimal Places for Instrument QC result

252 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Affects of Control Reported Decimals on Patient Moving Average Results
Numeric Value
The numeric value of the patient moving average QC result is set to the decimal
precision specified by the Control reported decimals value. When the ? symbol,
0, or 1 is specified, the decimal precision is 2. When 2-9 is specified, the decimal
precision is the specified value. You can view the numeric value on the detailed
QC Result window. To open the detailed QC Result window to view the numeric
value, double-select a QC result on the QC Results (Across controls view). You
can also view the numeric value in the Levy Jennings graph.
String Value
• Control reported decimal default value (?)
For QC results, the default value is the ? symbol.
If the ? symbol populates the Control reported decimals field for patient
moving average QC results, the decimal precision of the patient moving
average QC result displayed in the String Value column on the QC Across
Controls View window is 0, 1, or 2 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (0)
If you enter a Control reported decimals value of 0, a message displays
warning that the result could be rounded. You must confirm that you want to
enter the value 0.
When a Control reported decimals value of 0 is entered, the displayed value
in the String Value column is rounded to 0 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (1)
If you enter a Control reported decimals value of 1, a message displays
warning that the result could be rounded. You must confirm that you want to
enter the value 1.
When a Control reported decimals value of 1 is entered, the displayed value
in the String Value column is rounded to 1 decimal place.
• Control reported decimal value (2-9)
When a Control reported decimals value of 2-9 is entered, the displayed
value in the String Value column is rounded to the specified number of
decimals: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.

253
 Mean and SD
When the Control reported decimal value is set to 0, 1, or the ? symbol, the
displayed value on the QC Across Controls View window of the Mean and SD
fields is 2 decimal places.
When the Control reported decimal value is set between 2 and 9 inclusive, the
displayed decimal precision of the Mean and SD fields is the specified number of
decimal places.
Target Value and Target Deviation
On the QC Across Controls View window, the Target value and Target Deviation
value are displayed as entered without rounding.
Upload to LIS
Regardless of the value that populates the Control reported decimals field for
patient moving average QC results, no patient moving average QC result is
uploaded to the LIS.

Control Numeric Across Mean/SD Levy BioRad Sent to

Reported Value Control Jennings Data LIS
Decimal (String (Y value)
Value)

? 2 0-2 2 2 0-2 N/A

0 2 0 2 2 0 N/A
1 2 1 2 2 1 N/A
2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 N/A
* = whatever value comes from the Instrument
Table 2: Decimal Places for Patient Moving Average QC result

Affects of Control Reported Decimals on Calculated QC Results

Numeric Value
The numeric value of the calculated QC result is set to the result length of the
calculation with a limit of 9 decimal places. You can view the numeric value on
the detailed QC Result window. To open the detailed QC Result window to view

254 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

the numeric value, double-select a QC result on the QC Results (Across controls
view). You can also view the numeric value in the Levy Jennings graph.
String Value
NOTE: For calculated QC results, the value displayed in the StringValue column
of the Across Controls View screen never has more decimals places then the
number of places of the numeric value.
• Control reported decimal default value (?)
For QC results, the default value is the ? symbol.
If you use the ? symbol for Calculated QC Results, the ADVIA CentraLink
software displays a variable number of decimal places depending on the
result of the calculation. To avoid the variable precision that results from using
the ? symbol, set the control reported decimal value to the required precision.
• Control reported decimal value (0)
If you enter a Control reported decimals value of 0, a message displays
warning that the result could be rounded. You must confirm that you want to
enter the value 0.
When a Control reported decimals value of 0 is entered, the displayed value
in the String Value column is rounded to 0 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (1)
If you enter a Control reported decimals value of 1, a message displays
warning that the result could be rounded. You must confirm that you want to
enter the value 1.
When a Control reported decimals value of 1 is entered, the displayed value
in the String Value column is rounded to 1 decimal place.
• Control reported decimal value (2-9)
When a Control reported decimals value of 2-9 is entered, the displayed
value in the String Value column is rounded to the specified number of
decimals: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.

255
 Mean and SD
When the Control reported decimal value is set to 0, 1, or ?, the displayed value
on the QC Across Controls View window of the Mean and SD fields is 2 decimal
places.
When the Control reported decimal value is set between 2 and 9 inclusive, the
displayed decimal precision of the Mean and SD fields is the specified number of
decimal places.
Target Value and Target Deviation
On the QC Across Controls View window, the Target value and Target Deviation
value are displayed as entered without rounding.
Upload to LIS
• Control reported decimal default value (?)
If the ? symbol populates the Control reported decimals field for calculated
QC results, the decimal precision of the calculated QC result uploaded to the
LIS is the variable result length of the calculation, which is the string value.
• Control reported decimal value (0)
When you enter a Control reported decimals value of 0, the decimal precision
of the calculated QC result uploaded to the LIS is 0 decimal places.
• Control reported decimal value (1)
When you enter a Control reported decimals value of 1, the decimal precision
of the calculated QC result uploaded to the LIS is 1 decimal place.
• Control reported decimal value (2-9)
When a Control reported decimals value of 2-9 is entered, the decimal
precision of the calculated QC result uploaded to the LIS is the specified
number of decimals: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
Control Numeric Across Mean/SD Levy BioRad Sent to
Reported Value Control Jennings Data LIS
Decimal (String (Y value)
Value)

Result Result Result

? length of length of 2 2 0-2 length of
calc. calc. calc.

256 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Control Numeric Across Mean/SD Levy BioRad Sent to
Reported Value Control Jennings Data LIS
Decimal (String (Y value)
Value)

Result
0 length of 0 2 2 0 0
calc.
Result
1 length of 1 2 2 1 1
calc.
Result
2-9 length of 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9
calc.
* = varying result value of the calculation
Table 3: Decimal Places for Calculated QC result

257
 3. Select the Advanced tab.

4.
Field Description
Omit on LAS update Select this checkbox for external tests for which no
results are expected. Upon receipt of an external test
request, the ADVIA CentraLink system forwards it to
the LAS for sorting and subsequently omits it.
If only one LAS Order Translator is specified on the
LAS tab of the system Options window, the test request
is omitted after it is sent to the configured LAS.
If two LAS Order Translators are specified on the LAS
tab of the system Options window, the test request is
omitted after it is sent to both configured LAS.
Default value Pertains to morphology flags. When specified, a default
value such as “negative” is automatically assigned to
results missing in a message from an instrument with
“Full sample upload” set.

258 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Edit Warning When specified, the edit warning is displayed whenever
results are manually edited.
Delta check limit The maximum number of days since the previous result
of the same patient required delta checking.
If a delta check limit is not specified, delta checking is
always enabled.
Trigger This value is supplied by service personnel. It is a
MISPL program used for reflex testing.
On new requests This field references a MISPL function, which would
trigger a particular event whenever a new request for
this test is created.

259
 5. Select the Calculation tab for additional fields.

Field Description
Calculation A MISPL program used to calculate the result of a ratio
test based on the results of the component tests. Your
local technical support provider defines this program.
The program contains a calculation formula, which you
can view in this field. If this formula is changed, only the
future ratio tests are affected. The test results available
in the database stay the same.
Upon entering a change to the Calculation field, a
message displays warning that modifying the
calculation can affect the reporting of new and existing
results.
Norm severity limit This normal severity limit is one of the values against
which auto validation of calculated test results is
determined when a method is not associated with the
calculated test.

260 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Delta norm severity This delta normal severity limit is one of the values
limit against which auto validation of calculated test results
is determined when a method is not associated with the
calculated test.
QC severity limit This QC severity limit is one of the values against which
auto validation of calculated test results is determined
when a method is not associated with the calculated
test.
Instrument severity This instrument severity limit is one of the values
limit against which auto validation of calculated test results
is determined when a method is not associated with the
calculated test.

6. After entering the required test information, select OK.

The system adds the new test to the list of test definitions.

Defining Calculations
A calculation is a string-valued MISPL program that is used to calculate the result
of a test from the results of other tests. The formula is compiled against the
sample class for calculations involving patient results and against the QC result
class for calculations involving QC results. As such, the calculation includes
reference only shared members like functions NumericValue() and StringValue().
If this calculation is changed, only future results are affected.

Defining Test Groups

The Test Group table contains records representing groups of tests. After
creating test groups, you can assign tests to the test groups through the Test
editor window.
NOTE: If referenced by tests or requests, a test group should not be deleted.
Deleting a test group that is referenced can result in the generation of empty
audit logs. Instead of deleting test groups that are referenced by tests or
requests, reassign them.

261
 1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Test groups.
The Test groups window displays.
2. Select the New icon to access the Test group editor window.
3. Enter the name of the test group.
4. Select OK.
Field Description
Name Name of the test group.

Adding a Test to a Test Group

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests > By name.
The Test browser window displays.
2. Select the test to add to the test group.
3. Double-select the selected test.
The Test editor window displays.
4. In the Group field, enter the test group name.
NOTE: You can enter a test into one test group only.
5. Select OK.

Editing a Test Definition

1. Select the Tests icon on the toolbar.
The Tests browser window displays.
2. Double-select the test that you want to edit.
The Test editor window displays.
3. After editing the appropriate fields, select OK.

Deleting a Test Definition

1. Select the Tests icon on the toolbar.

262 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Tests browser window displays.
2. Select the test that you want to delete.
3. Select Delete on the toolbar.
If the test is not in use, the test is deleted.
NOTE: If any of the following items are associated with the test, you must
delete these items before you have the ability to delete the test: patient
results, QC results, norms and populations.

Setting a Test Unit

1. At the menu bar, select Configuration > Units.
The Units browser window displays.
2. Double-select the appropriate unit.

263
 The Unit editor window displays.

Field Description
Name A unique name for the unit, such as mL. This is a
required field.
Dimension The dimension of the unit, such as Volume. Double-
select to display a list of dimensions and make a
selection. This is a required field.
Upon entering a change to the Dimension field, a
message displays warning that modifying units can
affect the reporting of new results.

264 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Coefficient If the unit being defined is the standard or default unit
for this dimension, set the coefficient to 1.0. If this is an
alternate unit, set the coefficient to the correct value for
converting from the standard unit to the alternate unit.
To convert results from the standard unit to an alternate
unit, the ADVIA CentraLink software uses the formula:
Result (in alt. units) = Coefficient * Result (in std. units)
+ Term. This is a required field.
Upon entering a change to the Coefficient field, a
message displays warning that modifying units can
affect the reporting of new results.
Term A constant value that may be required in the conversion
from the standard unit to an alternate unit. Term = 0 for
standard units.
Upon entering a change to the Term field, a message
displays warning that modifying units can affect the
reporting of new results.

Assigning a Unit to a Test

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests > By name.
The Test browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate test.
3. Double-select the selected test.
The Test editor window displays.
4. In the Patient unit field, enter the unit.
5. Select OK.

265
 Setting a Dimension for a Unit
A dimension is a measure for a unit that is used in a test.
1. At the menu bar, select Configuration > Dimensions.
The Dimensions browser window displays.
2. Double-select the appropriate dimension.
The Dimension editor window displays.

3. Edit the name and select OK.

266 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Setting Result Choices
Result choices are used for ADVIA 120/2120 morphology flags and other non-
numerical, discrete alternatives for test results. The alternatives can be coded
numerically. The codes represent listed results, not a standard measure of any
kind. Delta checking does not exist for this type of test.
Access the Result choice window and enter the appropriate code:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests > By name.
The Tests browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate test.
3. Right-select the selected test and select Result choices.
The Result choices for test browser window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate result choice.
The Result choice editor window displays.

5. Edit the fields of the Result Choice editor window as required.

6. Select OK.
The Result Choice window remains open for additional entries. Continue to
add or edit entries as required.

267
 7. Upon completion, close the open windows.
Field Description
Code Unique identifier for the result.
Expansion Description of the result choice. If an expansion value is
defined, it displays on the Review and Edit window and
is transmitted to the LIS.
Severity Norm severity value that is assigned when this result is
received.

Setting Morphology Flags

Morphology flags are non-numeric result choices typically confined to the
alternatives: +, ++, +++, and negative. For this type of test, there is no delta
checking.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests.
The Tests browser window displays.
2. Select the test that has associated morphology flags.
3. Right-select the selected test and select Result Choices.
The Result choices for test browser window displays.
4. Double-select the code in the browser window.
The Result choice editor window displays.

268 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Setting Test Norms
Test norms are ranges of normal test values or reference ranges. For a given
test, you can assign several different norms including gender, species, and age
of the patient. When test results are entered, each result is verified against the
normal ranges defined for that test.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests.
The Tests browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate test.
3. Right-select the selected test and select Norms.
The Norm for test browser window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate norm.

269
 The Norm editor window displays.

Field Description
Evaluation order Required when you are adding additional ranges to the
default range. Defines the order in which ranges are
evaluated. Ranges with higher severity levels are
assigned a lower evaluation order so that they are
evaluated first. After the first non-zero severity is
identified, normal ranges are not evaluated.
Method The norm applies only to results obtained from the
instrument associated with the method.
Sex Patient sex.

270 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Species Patient species.
Min age Minimum age of patient.
Max age Maximum age of patient.
Age unit Unit for patient age.
Eligible Field for MISPL programs.
Low limit Low limit of norm.
High limit High limit of norm.
Severity Severity level if the test result exceeds the low or high
limit.
Comment Text comment. When a result falls outside of range, the
comment displays on the Review and Edit window.

271
 Setting Delta Norms
A delta norm specifies the normal variation in results between two successive
instances of the same test performed on different samples from the same patient.
The delta norm table stores threshold values for result changes between
consecutive tests on the same patient using different samples.
A delta norm value can be expressed as either of the following:
• Percentage change from the earlier result. Each result is verified against any
delta norms that were defined for that test when a previous result is available
for the same patient and when the time lapse between the two results does
not exceed the delta check limit specified for the test.
• If the Limit is absolute field is enabled, the absolute value of the difference
between the current result value and a previous result value are evaluated. If
the absolute difference exceeds the value specified within the Limit field, the
Delta norm severity is applied.
Access the Delta norms editor window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests.
The Tests browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate test.
3. Right-select the selected test and select Delta norms.

272 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Delta norms for test browser window displays.

4. Double-select the appropriate norm.

273
 The Delta norm editor window displays.

Field Description
Test The test for which Delta norm check is configured and
based.
Evaluation order Defines the order in which delta limits are evaluated.
Limits with higher severity levels are assigned a lower
evaluation order so that they are evaluated first.
After the first non-zero severity is identified, normal
ranges are not evaluated.
Species Patient species. If specified, the delta norm applies only
to this species.

274 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Eligible Field for MISPL programs.
If specified, the delta norm applies only if the site
function evaluates as true.
Your local technical support provider can configure a
GetPreviousLocalResult(0) MISPL that is triggered
through the Eligible field of the Delta Norm. For a given
patient, this MISPL extends the ability to retrieve the
most current previous result for the same test on a
different sample.
Limit is absolute This checkbox determines whether the value in the
Limit field is an absolute value, which is expressed in
the associated test unit.
If the Limit is absolute checkbox is not selected, the
value in the Limit field is a relative value, which is
expressed as a percentage.
Limit Depending on whether the Limit is absolute checkbox is
enabled, the Limit value is the absolute or relative result
value shift since the previous result.
When the Limit value is exceeded, a severity value is
assigned to the requests delta norm Severity field and a
comment value is assigned to the delta norm Comment
field.
Severity Severity level value is applied when the result value
shift because the previous result exceeds the Limit
value set in the Limit field.
Comment Text comment. When a result falls outside of range, the
comment displays on the Review and Edit window.

NOTE: You set the time interval for delta checking on the Tests window. For
more information, see Configuring Test Settings‚ page 243.

275
 Defining Test Aspects
You can define multiple result aspects or characteristics for a result from the
ADVIA Centaur® system.
The Patient result selector configured on the Basic tab of the Method is the
instrument result aspect that displays on the Review and Edit window. The
Control result selector configured on the Basic tab of the Method is the
instrument result aspect that displays on the QC Results window.
Although only one aspect displays on the Review and Edit window and on the QC
Results window, the ADVIA CentraLink system transmits all defined aspects to
the LIS.
1. Select the Instruments icon.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Aspects.
4. Select New on the toolbar to add a new Aspect.
For more information on supported result aspects, see Result Detail tab‚
page 165.

Creating Panels for Requestables

In the order entry process, individual tests and groups of tests, called panels, are
selected for each patient sample from the list of requests on the Requestables
browser. Simple requestables are mapped to individual tests. Panel requestables
containing other requestables of any type are mapped to panel members.
If required, the original test request can be omitted through MISPL. Once the
original test request is omitted, it must be reordered from the LIS if a rerun is
required.
You can create panels from existing test and panel definitions.
Access the Requestables window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Requestables.
The Requestable browser window displays.
2. Double-select the appropriate requestable.

276 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Requestables editor window displays.

Field Description
Name Unique identifier of the requestable.
Explicit When selected, the requestable is visible in the list of
requestables on the Order Entry window and can be
manually requested. Simple requestables, which are
not explicit, can still be requested as part of a panel
requestable.
Type of Requestable Valid values include the following: Simple and Panel.
Test Reference to the test which can be requested through
this requestable.

Create a new panel from the Requestable browser window:

1. Select the New icon.
The Requestable editor window displays.
2. Enter the Name for the new panel.
3. Select Explicit.
4. Select Panel from the Type of Requestables field.

277
 The Description field displays in place of the Test field.
5. Type a description of the panel, and select OK.
The new name is added to the list of requests.
6. In the Requestables browser, select the new panel name.
7. Right-select the selected panel and select As panel requestable >
Members.
The Panel members browser window displays.
8. Select the New icon on the toolbar.
The Panel member editor window displays.
9. Double-select the Requestable field on the Panel member editor window.
A new Requestables browser window displays.
10. Highlight the test or panel that you want to include in the new panel and select
OK.
The newly opened Requestables browser window closes. The selected name
displays on the Panel member editor window.
11. To add the name to the Panel members browser, select OK.
12. Repeat steps 9 - 11 until all panel members are selected.

Deleting a Panel
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Requestables.
The Requestable browser window displays.
2. Select the panel to delete.
3. Right-select the selected panel and select As panel requestable >
Members.
The Panel members browser window displays.
4. Select the test or panel to delete and select Delete.
5. Select Yes to delete the panel member.
6. Select Close on the Panel members browser to return to the Requestables
browser window.

278 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Adding Tests to Requestables
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Requestables.
The Requestable browser window displays.
2. Select the New icon on the toolbar.
The Requestable editor window displays.
3. Type the name for the new test panel.
4. Select Explicit.
5. Select Simple.
6. Double-select the Test field.
The Tests browser displays.
7. Select the test to add to the list of requests.
8. Select OK to add the name on the Requestable editor window.
9. Select OK on the Requestable editor window to add the test to the list in the
Requestables browser window.

279
Defining Instruments
The Instruments editor window defines the instruments connected to the
ADVIA CentraLink system.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
You can also select the Instruments icon on the toolbar. The Instruments
browser window displays.
2. At the editing toolbar, select the New icon.
The Basic tab of the Instrument editor window displays.

Field Description
Name The unique identifier of the instrument.

280 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Type Specifies the type of instrument:
• Normal - A traditional instrument. Certain normal
instruments, IMMULITE 2000 and 2500 and
ADVIA Chemistry 1800 can be connected to a
concentrator.
NOTE: Support for ADVIA Centaur XP connectivity
to a concentrator is currently in development.
Each of the following instrument parameters must
be defined for a normal instrument: flags, methods,
aspects, OnEndResultMessage, full sample upload,
batch size, barcode Translation.
Normal instruments that are eligible for connection
to a concentrator can only be a member of one
concentrator.
• Concentrator - An instrument of type concentrator is
a system that facilitates instrument connections.
When a concentrator configuration is defined,
normal instruments must be defined to the
concentrator. Test requests are scheduled against
the concentrator. The ADVIA CentraLink software
does not know which of the normal instruments
connected to the concentrator will receive and
execute test requests.
Unless the Auto target feature, which references
the AutoTarget Seq No value from the Methods of
normal instruments, is enabled, the concentrator
targets the normal instrument that will receive the
workorder.
One concentrator instrument can have two normal
instrument connections.
A concentrator cannot be a member of another
concentrator.
Refer to Understanding Instrument Types‚
page 286.

281
 Field Description
Parent Instrument Only instruments of type Normal can be associated to a
Parent Instrument. A Parent Instrument must always
refer to an instrument of type Concentrator.
NOTE: If you specify a parent instrument value, you
cannot specify a translator value. This safeguard is
employed to ensure that communication for instruments
defined to a concentrator is managed by the translator
of the concentrator.
Group Reference to the containing instrument group.
NOTE: All instrument records, that is, those of type
Normal and of type Concentrator, can refer to an
instrument group. No restriction is imposed on an
instrument’s reference to an instrument group.
In a concentrator configuration the following applies:
• For test requests that are scheduled against the
concentrator, the instrument group references the
instrument group of the concentrator.
• For test requests that contain a result from the
concentrator, the instrument group references the
normal instrument that generated the result.
Translator References the translator record, which defines
communication with the instrument.
NOTE: If you specify a translator value, you cannot
specify a parent instrument value. This safeguard is
employed to ensure that communication for instruments
defined to a concentrator is managed by the translator
of the concentrator.
Coding system References the coding system record, which defines
the mapping of tests and other codes between the
ADVIA CentraLink system and the instrument.
Refer to Setting Up Coding Systems‚ page 320.

282 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Default sample type When the sample record in the ADVIA CentraLink
system does not reference a sample type, this default
value specifies the sample type that should be
associated with the sample in the workorder message
to the instrument. Required only for instruments that
must have some sample type in their workorder
message.
Default container type When the sample record in the ADVIA CentraLink
system does not reference a container type, this default
value specifies the container type that should be
associated with the sample in the workorder message
to the instrument. Required only for instruments that
must have some container type in their workorder
message.
Enable rescheduling If selected, an instrument can rerun a test request when
the test request is scheduled to another instrument.
If not selected, an instrument cannot rerun a test
request when the test request is scheduled to another
instrument.
Moving average batch Determines how many patient results are used to
size compute a new moving average.
If the value 10, for example, is entered to the Moving
average batch size field, 10 patient results for the
method generate a QC result.

283
 3. Select the Advanced tab.
The Advanced tab of the Instrument window displays.

Field Description
Barcode translation References a string-valued, instrument-based MISPL
function. The MISPL function is to determine whether
an incoming barcode identifies a patient sample, a
control sample, or a sample with an unreadable
barcode and to translate the incoming barcode into
either a sample barcode or a QC lot code that matches
a database record.
Upon entering a change to the Barcode translation
field, a message displays warning that modifying the
Barcode translation can affect sample identification.

284 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Download by Worklist Activates the workorder download by worklist feature
for this instrument.
In response to an ALL query from the instrument
translator, the ADVIA CentraLink software returns the
contents of the first worklist available for download to
the instrument as opposed to returning all eligible
samples.
NOTE: To resend a workorder request to an instrument,
you must first unschedule the request and then resend
the unscheduled request to the instrument.
On ALL Query Match In response to an ALL query without sample
Target identification from the instrument translator, the
ADVIA CentraLink software returns requests targeted
to the instrument associated with the translator that
generated the query.
On ALL Query Max In response to an ALL query without sample
Samples identification from the instrument translator, the
ADVIA CentraLink software returns no more than the
maximum number of samples defined in this field.
When targeting is disabled and multiple, equivalent
instruments of the same type exist, this value-enables
the distribution of requests among same type
instruments.
If the ? symbol populates the field, all available
requests are downloaded in response to a query from
an instrument translator.
Max previous results If selected and if the instrument is capable of
performing delta checking, the maximum number of
previous results for the same patient for the same test
can be sent to the instrument with the workorder.

285
 Field Description
Full sample upload If selected, a patient result upload is considered final;
that is, no additional results for the sample are
expected from the instrument. If some results are
missing upon result upload, their default values as
defined in the test record are automatically assigned.
NOTE: Full sample upload does not apply to QC
results.
On end result Reference to a MISPL function, which is executed
message when a complete result message is received from the
instrument.

Understanding Instrument Types

Two instrument types exist: Normal and Concentrator.
An instrument of type Normal is a traditional instrument to which workorders are
downloaded and from which results are uploaded. All instrument parameters, for
example, flags, methods, aspects, OnEndResultMessage, full sample upload,
batch size, barcode Translation, must be defined on a normal instrument. The
following normal instruments can be connected to a concentrator: IMMULITE
2000 and 2500 and ADVIA Chemistry 1800.
NOTE: Support for ADVIA Centaur XP connectivity to a concentrator is currently
in development.
An instrument of type concentrator is a system that facilitates instrument
connections. When a concentrator configuration is defined, normal instruments
must be defined to the concentrator. You cannot delete a concentrator record
while a normal instrument is defined to the concentrator. Flags are not supported
on the concentrator instrument type.

Instrument Connections to the ADVIA CentraLink System

Only normal instruments contribute to the total number of connected instruments
on the ADVIA CentraLink system. Concentrator instruments do not contribute to
the total number of connected instruments. The translator that the normal

286 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

instrument communicates with is the normal instrument’s connection to the
ADVIA CentraLink system.
At the Instrument window, you would define a normal instrument connected to a
concentrator as having a parent instrument. This parent instrument value
identifies the concentrator to which the normal instrument is connected. As a
parent instrument is defined to this normal instrument, a translator cannot be
defined. This ensures that when a normal instrument is connected to a
concentrator, all communication is managed by the translator of the concentrator.
At the Instrument window, you would define a concentrator instrument as having
a Translator. This concentrator translator serves as the translator for the normal
instrument, which references the translator indirectly through its specified parent
instrument field value. In this scenario, the translator of the concentrator defines
the normal instrument’s connection to the ADVIA CentraLink system.
At the Instrument window, a normal instrument that is not connected to a
concentrator is defined as having a Translator. In this scenario, this normal
instrument translator defines the normal instrument’s connection to the
ADVIA CentraLink system.

Workorder Processing with a Concentrator Configuration

During workorder download, test requests are scheduled to the concentrator,
which targets the connected normal instrument for processing.
NOTE: Unless the Auto target feature is enabled, the concentrator targets the
normal instrument that will receive the workorder.
The test request is processed on the normal instrument, which generates the
result. The generated result record contains the result value as well as a
reference back to the normal instrument identifier. In order for the generated
result record values to be saved as a result to the concentrator, to which the
request is scheduled, the normal instrument must be defined to the concentrator.
Without a valid normal instrument identifier to which the result values are
mapped, the concentrator cannot use the valid result and stores the result value
as “X_NORESULT.”

Concentrator Overriding Values

The following instrument fields of the concentrator instrument override the setting
in the corresponding fields of the underlying normal instruments.
• Maximum previous results

287
 • Coding system
• Default sample type
NOTE: When a sample type is not defined for the sample in the
ADVIA CentraLink software, the sample type of the concentrator is
downloaded to the normal instrument in the Workorder message.
• Default container
• Enable rescheduling parameter
NOTE: When replying to a Query message, the Enable rescheduling
parameter of the concentrator is used because tests are scheduled against
the concentrator. The ADVIA CentraLink software cannot determine
beforehand which of the normal instruments connected to the concentrator
will receive and execute a test request.
• Download by worklist
• On All query match target
• On All query max samples

How Queries from the Concentrator are Processed

Specific Query
When the ADVIA CentraLink software receives a specific query from the
concentrator, the ADVIA CentraLink software downloads a workorder for the
sample attaching all methods whose associated tests can be done by either one
or both of the normal instruments defined to the concentrator. The
ADVIA CentraLink software does not determine which of the normal instruments
connected to the concentrator will receive and execute test requests. Except
when the Auto target feature is enabled, the concentrator is responsible for
targeting the normal instrument that will receive the workorder.

288 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

All Query
When the ADVIA CentraLink software receives an ALL query from the
concentrator, the following occurs depending on whether instrument download by
worklist is enabled:

If the instrument Then...

download by
worklist...
is enabled all worklists of the normal instruments connected to the
concentrator are transmitted in the workorder to the
concentrator. The workorder contains all corresponding
sample information in the worklists of the normal
instruments and requests that match the target of the
normal instrument. If a worklist for the concentrator is
available, that worklist is also transmitted to the
concentrator.
is not enabled the concentrator parameters specified at the Instrument
window in the On ALL Query Match Target and On ALL
Query Max Samples fields are taken into account and
the appropriate workorders are downloaded to the
concentrator.

Test requests are scheduled to the concentrator, which targets the connected
normal instruments for processing.

Test Selection Update

The ADVIA CentraLink software can be configured to automatically download
updates to requests for a sample that have already been queried for and
downloaded to the concentrator.
When the ADVIA CentraLink software receives a test selection update from the
concentrator, it only downloads the add-on, reflex and rerun tests of samples
already transmitted to the concentrator at some time in the past.
Updated workorder information for a given sample that has not been downloaded
to the concentrator previously, is not downloaded to the concentrator in response
to a Test Selection Update. The ADVIA CentraLink software determines whether

289
 workorder information for a given sample was sent to the concentrator previously
by checking the Sample log table for applicable concentrator instrument records.

How results from the Concentrator are Interpreted and Displayed

Patient Results
At the Review and Edit window, patient results received from the concentrator are
associated with the normal instrument from which they were generated, not the
concentrator. These patient results display with the normal instrument. The flags
attached to the patient results refer to the flags of the normal instrument. Auto
validation rules applied to the patient results correspond to those defined on the
Method records of the normal instrument.

Moving averages
Moving averages refer to the normal instrument. To enable moving averages,
select the Check moving average checkbox on the method of the normal
instrument.

Full Sample Upload

Full sample upload refers to the normal instrument. To enable full sample upload,
select the Full sample upload checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Instrument
window of the normal instrument. When the concentrator receives results from a
normal instrument supporting full sample upload, all test requests scheduled to
the concentrator that can be performed by the normal instrument are assigned
the default value specified on the corresponding tests.

QC Results
At the QC Results (Across controls view) window, QC results received from the
concentrator are associated with the normal instrument from which they were
generated, not the concentrator. These QC results display with the normal
instrument. The QC flags attached to the QC results refer to the flags of the
normal instrument. QC severities raised for these results correspond to those
defined on the Method records of the normal instrument.

Normal Instrument Identifier Upload to the LIS

The normal instrument identifier, (Request.Instrument), is transmitted to the LIS
when this upload behavior is supported by the LIS translator.

290 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Instrument Logs
The Instrument Log window stores event information on activities performed on
an instrument. The types of activities include the following: logging, maintenance,
calibration, and reagent change.
For those events associated with an instrument and a method and for which a
QC population exists, you can associate this instrument log event with a dotted
vertical line that displays on the Levey-Jennings graph.

Access the Instrument Log editor window:

1. At the Instrument window, right-select and select Related > Instrument logs.

291
 NOTE: You can also access this window through the Method window.
The Instrument logs browser window displays.
2. At the Instrument logs browser window, select the New icon or press Insert.
The Instrument logs editor window displays.

Field Description
Instrument Instrument to which the log applies.
When the Instrument log browser is accessed through
the Method window, this field is automatically populated
with the instrument value on the Method window.
Method Reference to a specific method.
When the Instrument log browser is accessed through
the Method window, this field is automatically populated
with the test value on the Method window.

292 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Event time The time in which the activity that was performed on the
instrument took place
Event type The type of activity performed on the instrument:
• Log
• Maintenance
• Calibration
• Reagent change
Show on qcgraph If selected, a dotted vertical line that corresponds to the
event is plotted and displays on the Levey-Jennings
graph when the event is associated with an instrument
and a method and for which a QC population exists.
Code Code representing the event that displays on the
Levey-Jennings graph.
NOTE: To prevent legibility issues, limit the amount of
text for display on the Levey-Jennings graph.
Description Free text description of the event.
Comment Free text comment.

Instrument Setup Targeting

The Setup targeting option enables targeting for all associated methods at once.
Access the Setup targeting window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instrument browser window displays.

293
 2. Right-select the appropriate instrument and select Setup targeting.

Field Description
Enable Determines whether requests for the instrument's tests
can be targeted to the instrument.
Seq no Determines the order, among all eligible instruments, in
which the current instrument is considered as target for
a matching request.

Instrument Retarget Function

When an instrument is taken offline, you have the option of deleting the worklists
that are in Ready status for this offline instrument. The process of deleting the
status Ready worklists for the offline instruments allows for worklists that are not
yet scheduled and targeted to this instrument to be targeted to another
instrument and prevents additional targeting to this offline instrument.
When the instrument is brought online, worklists are retargeted to this instrument
using the Setup targeting function.
Access the Retarget window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instrument browser window displays.

294 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

2. Right-select the appropriate instrument and select Retarget.

Field Description
Delete ready worklists If selected, all Ready status worklists targeted to the
instrument are deleted.

Configuring Moving Average Batch Size for an Instrument

1. From the instrument editor window, enter the Moving average batch size.
The Moving average batch size must be entered for each sample in every
moving average data point.
2. Select OK.

Enabling Moving Average for a Method

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Tests.
4. Double-select on the appropriate method.
The Method editor window displays.
5. Select Check Moving Average.
6. Select OK.

Setting up QC Populations for Moving Average Data

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Routine > Quality Control > QC
populations.

295
 The QC population query window displays.
2. Select OK.
The QC Populations browser displays.
3. Select New on the editing toolbar.
The QC Population editor window displays.
4. Enter the Method test.
5. Select Moving average.
By selecting Moving average, you are specifying that this is a patient-based
population. The selected moving average checkbox specifies that a species,
not a QC Lot, is grouped with the test and instrument within the QC
population.
6. Enter the remaining data and select OK.
See QC Populations‚ page 177 for details on defining QC populations.
Automatically Creating QC Populations for Moving Average Data
If you did not create QC Populations for the moving average data, the
populations are automatically created when patient results are received from the
instruments. Once these populations exist, however, you must define the
Reference value and Reference deviation in order for Westgard checks to apply.
NOTE: Westgard rules are applied using the Reference value and Reference
deviation rather than the Target value and Target deviation.
To initially set the Target value and Target deviation as the Reference value and
Reference deviation:
1. At the QC Population browser window, select the population for which you
want to define the Reference value and Reference deviation.
2. Right-select the selected population and select Set Target.
The Set Target window displays.
3. Enter the Target value and Target deviation.
4. Select Set as reference.
5. Select OK.

296 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Target value and Target deviation is also set in the Reference value and
Reference deviation fields.
Once statistics are available, change the Reference value and Reference
deviation to Statistics as follows:
1. Select the population for which you want to change the Reference value and
Reference deviation.
2. Right-select the selected population and select Set Reference.
The Set Reference window displays.
3. Select Target, Current Statistics, or Cumulative Statistics.
4. Select OK.

297
Creating or Modifying Instrument Groups
You can create groups of instruments. An instrument can belong to one
instrument group only. You can add instruments to a group through the
Instruments editor window.
References to the containing instrument group are automatically created
whenever new requests or QC results are created, which improves query
performance. When an instrument changes groups, however, requests and QC
results are not synchronized.
NOTE: When instrument groups are created, patient results received prior to
instrument group creation are not returned in queries for the specified group.
NOTE: If referenced by requests, QC results, or other instrument groups, an
instrument group should not be deleted. Deleting an instrument group that is
referenced can result in the generation of empty audit logs. Instead of deleting
instrument groups that are referenced by requests, QC results, or other
instrument groups, reassign them.
Access the Instruments Groups editor window and enter or modify an instrument
group:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instrument groups.
The Instrument groups browser window displays.
2. To create a new instrument group, select the New icon or press Insert.
3. To access an existing instrument group, double-select the appropriate
instrument group.
The Instrument Group editor window displays.
4. Enter or modify the Name and Description of the instrument group.
5. Select OK.
Assign an instrument to an instrument group:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. At the Instruments browser window or the Instrument editor window, right-
select the instrument and then select Set Group.
The Set Group editor window displays.

298 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

3. To display all available Instrument groups, double-select the Group field.
4. Double-select the desired Instrument group.
5. On the Set group window, select OK.
NOTE: Using the right-select Set group function at the Instruments browser,
you can assign multiple instruments to a group at the same time.

299
Configuring Instrument Tests (Methods) and Flags
Setting Instrument Flags
You define Instrument flags for every new instrument configured in the
ADVIA CentraLink system. The ADVIA CentraLink system only receives flags
that are already defined. Instrument flags that are not configured in the
ADVIA CentraLink system are ignored.
NOTE: QC results received with undefined instrument flags are automatically
omitted from the ADVIA CentraLink software.
An instrument flag has a code, explanatory text (expansion), and two severity
flags. You can define the severity that is assigned when an instrument flag is
associated with a QC result, and you can define the severity that is assigned
when an instrument flag is associated with a patient result. Defining these flags
independently allows for more precise instrument severity determinations
between QC result and patient results respectively.
To see the flags on the Review and Edit window, you must define the instrument
flags.
Access the Instruments window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the instrument for which you are defining flags.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Flags.
The Flags defined on instrument browser window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate flag.

300 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Instrument flag editor window displays.

Field Description
Instrument This field is automatically filled with the name of the
instrument you are modifying.
Code Unique identification for the flag. This code must match
the code used by the instrument.
Expansion Determines the flag description on the Review and Edit
window and on reports.
Patient severity The overriding patient severity flag value applicable to
patient results, which automatically sets the Instrument
value on the Severity tab of the Request window to the
highest severity.
NOTE: If the patient severity flag value is greater than
the instrument severity value on the Severity tab of the
Request window, then this patient severity flag value
overwrites the instrument severity value on the Request
window.

301
 Field Description
Control severity The overriding QC severity flag value applicable to
control samples, which automatically sets the
Instrument severity field value of the QC results window
to the highest severity.
If this control severity flag value is greater than the
Instrument severity field value of the QC results
window, then this control severity flag value overwrites
the Instrument severity field value of the QC results
window.
NOTE: If the instrument severity flag is not relevant to
QC results, set the Control severity at the Instrument
Flag window to 0. If the instrument severity flag is
relevant to QC results, set the Control severity at the
Instrument Flag window to equal the highest value of
the Westgard rules applicable to that method.
If an unknown flag is received, the field value is set to
-5.

Setting Instrument Tests (Methods)

You must define all the tests performed on an instrument in a Tests on instrument
list. The tests on this list are instrument-specific, and the test definitions do not
automatically apply to another instrument.
The Method window enables you to configure a test on an instrument and to
specify a different result selector for patient results and control results.
NOTE: Your administrator or local technical service provider must ensure that
the test list for an instrument is accurate. It is possible to add a new instrument to
the instrument list by copying settings from an existing instrument using the Deep
Copy function.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the instrument for which you are defining a method.

302 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Tests.
The Tests on instrument browser window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate test.
The Method editor window displays.

303
 The top portion of the Method window includes the following fields:

Field Description
Test Reference to the test that can be performed on the
instrument.
NOTE: If the test is a calculated test, the
ADVIA CentraLink software does not download orders
or accept results from the instrument.
Instrument This field is automatically filled with the name of the
instrument.

Basic Tab
The Basic tab fields include the following:
Field Description
Patient result selector This selector is a reference to one of the instrument’s
aspects. The Patient result selector determines the
aspect that represents the actual result value for patient
results.
This aspect displays on the Review and Edit window.
The ADVIA Centaur system is an example of a system
that makes use of this field value.
Commonly used aspects are DOSE (concentration)
and INTR (interpretation). For information on defining a
result selector see Defining Test Aspects‚ page 276.

304 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Control result selector This selector is a reference to one of the instrument’s
aspects. The Control result selector determines the
aspect that represents the actual result value for QC
results.
This aspect displays at the QC Results window.
The ADVIA Centaur system is an example of a system
that makes use of this field value.
Commonly used aspects are DOSE (concentration)
and INTR (interpretation). For information on defining a
result selector see Defining Test Aspects‚ page 276.
Unit Double-select the field to open the Units for dimension
browser. Double-select the unit you want to enter in the
editor. Edit this field only if the unit of the method differs
from the default unit in the test table. The units must be
of the same dimension for proper conversion to take
place.
Upon entering a change to the Unit field, a warning
message displays. The message prompts that you
should only modify the Unit on the method if it is
necessary to convert the result uploaded from the
instrument to match the units reported in the
ADVIA CentraLink software. Modifying the Unit on the
method can affect the reporting of new results.

305
 Field Description
Low detection limit Linearity Range: If results fall outside the delimited
range, they are converted to the detection limit,
preceded by a <, and displays on the Review & Edit
window. The value displayed on the Review & Edit
window is the value uploaded to the LIS.
Upon entering a change to the Low detection limit field,
a warning message displays. The message prompts
that modifying the Low detection limit will change new
results from the instrument that are less than the Low
detection limit to the Low Limit value, preceded by the
“<” symbol.
High detection limit Linearity Range: If results fall outside the delimited
range, they are converted to the detection limit,
preceded by a >, and displays on the Review & Edit
window. The value displayed on the Review & Edit
window is the value uploaded to the LIS.
Upon entering a change to the High detection limit field,
a warning message displays. The message prompts
that modifying the High detection limit will change new
results from the instrument that are greater than the
High detection limit to the High Limit value, preceded by
the “>” symbol.
Enable targeting Select this checkbox if requests for the method's test
are targeted to the method's instrument.

306 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Auto target seq no This field is enabled when the Auto target requests
checkbox of the More tab of the system Options
window is selected.
If the auto targeting feature is activated, the value in
this field determines the instrument that can satisfy the
request.
Among the instruments capable of satisfying the
request, the one with the lowest value is selected as
target.
NOTE: For instruments of type concentrator, the
concentrator typically targets the normal instrument that
will receive the workorder. When the Auto target feature
is activated and the ADVIA CentraLink software
receives an ALL query from the concentrator, however,
test requests are transmitted to the concentrator and
these requests are targeted to the normal instrument
specified within this Auto target seq no field.
Enable workorders Select this checkbox if workorders for this test are sent
to the instrument.
If the test is never ordered individually, but only as part
of a panel, leave the checkbox unselected. In the LAS
environment, this checkbox is unselected if the test is
disabled on the LineMaster.
Download dilution Select this checkbox if the instrument method can
accept a dilution coefficient.
Check moving average Select this checkbox if the moving average is
calculated for this test.

307
 Field Description
Counter key label Specify the key to be used for counting test results in
the Diff Pad. Do not edit the field for tests that do not
use the Diff Pad. Ensure that the ? symbol displays in
the field.
Upon entering a change to the Counter key label field, a
message displays warning that modifying the Counter
key label can affect the manual entry of results using
the Diffpad.
Reagent information Upon receipt of a global reagent information message
from an instrument, the reagent information is stored in
this field.
If result-specific reagent information does not exist for
the result associated with this method, global reagent
information is also saved to the Reagent information
field of the Request or QC request window for the
result.
NOTE: Reagent information received at the result level
has priority over global reagent information stored at
the Method.

308 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Autovalidation Tab
The Autovalidation tab includes the following fields:

309
 Field Description
QC severity This field is automatically filled with the highest QC
severity of the method since the last QC reset and can
be one of the following: Westgard QC severity,
instrument flag control severity, QC type error severity,
QC severity on invalid reference.
See Resetting the QC Severity from the QC Results
(Across Controls View) Window‚ page 205.
QC severity on type The value assigned to the QC severity when a control
error result is received that cannot be converted to the test's
control data type.
This integer value defaults to 5.
Refer to Type Error QC Result‚ page 194.
QC severity on invalid QC severity on invalid reference is the value assigned
reference to the QC severity when a control result is received with
a comparator that prevents it from being
unambiguously positioned with respect to the
population reference value.
For example:
Control result value <10
Population reference value 5
This integer value defaults to 5.
Refer to Invalid Reference QC Result‚ page 195.
Allow on type error Allow on type error determines whether automatic
validation proceeds when a patient result is received
that cannot be converted to the test's patient data type.

310 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Allow on invalid range Allow on invalid range determines whether automatic
validation proceeds when a patient result is received
with a comparator that prevents it from being
unambiguously positioned with respect to the
applicable normal ranges.
For example:
Patient result value <10
Range values 5 to 6
WARNING: Do not enable Allow on invalid range.
If your normal ranges are properly configured or if you
do not have norms defined, you will not receive invalid
reference patient results and there is no reason to
enable this setting.
Severity limits If requests in Review status receive a result through
this method and the request's Norm, Delta norm, QC
and Instrument severities are all below the respective
Norm severity limit, Delta norm severity limit, QC
severity limit and Instrument severity limit, then it is
automatically validated. If any of the limits are left
unspecified, no auto-validation occurs.
The following severity limits are used in the auto
validation of methods:
• Norm severity limit
• Delta norm severity limit
• QC severity limit
• Instrument severity limit

Configuring Autovalidation for a Method

When results are received from an instrument for a request and the request’s
Norm, Delta norm, QC, and Instrument severities are all below the respective
Norm severity limit, Delta norm severity limit, QC severity limit, and Instrument

311
 severity limit of the method, the result is automatically validated. If any of the
limits are left unspecified, no auto validation occurs.

Westgard Tab
By default, Westgard checks are enabled. You have the option, however, of
disabling individual Westgard checks.
When any of the fields of the Westgard tab is set to 0, the individual Westgard
check is disabled. To the right of a disabled Westgard field, the label “(disabled)”
displays. When a Westgard check is disabled, no Westgard comment is added to
the QC result and no Failed Westgard comment is uploaded to the LIS.
The Westgard tab includes the following fields:

312 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
1-2s, 1-3s, 10-x, 2-2s, Severity assigned to the method QC severity if a QC
4-1s and R-4s result obtained through this instrument channel fails the
respective Westgard check and if the current QC
severity of the method is lower.
When any of these fields is set to 0, the individual
Westgard check is disabled. To the right of a disabled
Westgard field, the label “(disabled)” displays.
Apply Westgard Determines whether the method is subject to Westgard
checks checking on numerical tests.

313
 Field Description
Include comparator Determines whether comparator QC results contribute
QC results to Westgard checks.
• When the checkbox is selected, the comparator QC
results contribute to Westgard checks.
• Default - When the checkbox is not selected, the
comparator QC results do not contribute to
Westgard checks. The type error severity is raised
for the Method, which prevents autovalidation of all
patient results for the specified method. This QC
result is not taking into account for Westgard
checks of subsequent QC results.
When a comparator QC result does not contribute to
Westgard checks, a comment displays in the Comment
field of the QC Result (Across controls view) window.
This additional comment is added to existing
comments. The comment is not uploaded to the LIS
and is not listed on reports. Refer to the description for
the Comment field in the Statistics Area‚ page 202.
To enable this feature for all methods of an instrument
or test, refer to Configuring Westgard Rules for an
Instrument‚ page 316 or Configuring Westgard Rules
for a Test‚ page 317.
By default, the checkbox is not selected.

Setting Autovalidation for a Single Instrument

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the instrument for which you are setting limits.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Tests.
The Tests on instrument browser window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate test.
The Method editor window displays.

314 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

5. To view the currently defined autovalidation limits, select the Autovalidation
tab.
6. Right-select on the method window and select Setup autovalidation.
The Setup autovalidation window displays.
NOTE: The Setup autovalidation window is used to define the autovalidation
limits. The Setup autovalidation window should not be used to view the
autovalidation limits that were defined for the method because the Setup
autovalidation window always displays each of the autovalidation limit fields
set by default to a question mark. To view the autovalidation limits defined for
a method, always view the values displayed at the Autovalidation tab of the
Method window. If you select OK at the Setup autovalidation window and the
autovalidation limit fields are set to the default question mark, the
autovalidation limit fields are changed to a question mark. If it is not your
intent to define the autovalidation limits, select Cancel at the Setup
autovalidation window.
7. Enter the new severity level for each limit.
8. At the Setup autovalidation window, select OK.
9. At the Method editor window, select OK.

Configuring Westgard Rules

The ADVIA CentraLink system comes preconfigured with standard Westgard
checks to apply to QC results. The default QC severity level for each Westgard
check is 1. A setting of 0 disables the specific check.
To the right of a disabled Westgard field, the label “(disabled)” displays. When a
Westgard check is disabled, no Westgard comment is added to the QC result and
no Failed Westgard comment is uploaded to the LIS.

315
 Configuring Westgard Rules for an Instrument
You can simultaneously setup Westgard checking for all methods of an
instrument through the Setup Westgard window.
Customize the QC severity level for all Westgard checks performed on all results
from a single instrument:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the instrument for which you are setting limits.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Tests.
The Tests on instrument browser window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate test.
The Method editor window displays.
5. Select the Westgard tab.
6. Enter the new severity level for each Westgard check.
When any of the fields of the Setup Westgard window is set to 0, the
individual Westgard check is disabled. To the right of a disabled Westgard
field, the label “(disabled)” displays. When a Westgard check is disabled, no
Westgard comment is added to the QC result and no Failed Westgard
comment is uploaded to the LIS.
7. Select Apply westgard checks.
If this check box is not selected, the Westgard rules are not applied to the
method.
If you select Include comparator QC results, comparator QC results
contribute to Westgard checks for all methods of a test. When a comparator
QC result does not contribute to Westgard checks, a comment displays in the
Comment field of the QC Result (Across controls view) window. Refer to the
description of the Comment field in the Statistics Area‚ page 202.
8. Select OK.

316 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Configuring Westgard Rules for a Test
You can simultaneously setup Westgard checking for all methods of a test
through the Setup Westgard window.
Configure the system to use other severity values for the Westgard checks
performed on a specific test regardless of the instrument on which it was
performed by completing the following steps:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Tests.
The Tests browser window displays.
2. Select the test for which you are setting limits.
3. Right-select the selected test and select Setup Westgard.
The Setup Westgard editor window displays.

4. Enter the new severity level for each Westgard check.

When any of the fields of the Setup Westgard window is set to 0, the
individual Westgard check is disabled. To the right of a disabled Westgard
field, the label “(disabled)” displays. When a Westgard check is disabled, no
Westgard comment is added to the QC result and no Failed Westgard
comment is uploaded to the LIS.
5. Select Apply westgard checks checkbox.

317
 If this check box is not selected, the Westgard rules are not applied to the
method.
6. If you select Include comparator QC results, comparator QC results
contribute to Westgard checks for all methods of a test.
When a comparator QC result does not contribute to Westgard checks, a
comment displays in the Comment field of the QC Result (Across controls
view) window. Refer to the description of the Comment field in the Statistics
Area‚ page 202.
7. Select OK.

Configuring Westgard Rules for a Method

Configure the system to use other severity values for the Westgard checks
performed on specific tests on a single instrument by completing the following
steps:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Instruments.
The Instruments browser window displays.
2. Select the instrument for which you are setting limits.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Tests.
The Tests on instrument browse window displays.
4. Double-select the appropriate test.
The Method editor window displays.
5. Select the Advanced tab.
6. Select the Westgard setup tab.
7. Enter the new severity level for each Westgard check.
When any of the fields of the Setup Westgard window is set to 0, the
individual Westgard check is disabled. To the right of a disabled Westgard
field, the label “(disabled)” displays. When a Westgard check is disabled, no
Westgard comment is added to the QC result and no Failed Westgard
comment is uploaded to the LIS.
8. Select Apply westgard checks.
If this check box is not selected, the Westgard rules are not applied to the
method.

318 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

9. Select OK.

Method Setup Targeting Function

The Setup targeting option from the Method window determines whether
matching test requests are downloaded to the instrument. This function is not
applicable to methods referring a calculated test.
Access the Setup targeting window:
1. At the Method editor window, right-select, and select Setup targeting.

Field Description
Enable Determines whether matching test requests can be
targeted to the instrument.
Seq no Determines the order, among all instruments capable of
performing the associated test, in which the associated
instrument is considered as target for a matching
request.

319
Setting Up Coding Systems
The ADVIA CentraLink system typically communicates with many different
applications using different names for the same item. To avoid naming conflicts,
you can set up coding systems.
A coding system is a set of names used by a given application to denote
equivalent ADVIA CentraLink system names. Coding systems are stored in the
ADVIA CentraLink system database and can be modified or expanded at any
time. in order for the changes to take effect after modifying a coding system, you
have to stop and restart the services and translators.
Coding systems can contain codes for the following items
• Tests
• Sample types
• Container types
• Species
• Sample source

Using Coding Systems

Coding systems work for the following items:
• Instruments
• LIS
• ADVIA Automation system
Your local technical support provider configures the LIS and ADVIA automation
coding systems. You may need to add an instrument test code.
You can reference coding systems from instruments to denote the coding system
used for instrument communication. Multiple instruments can use the same
coding system. This typically occurs when you are using several instruments of
the same brand and type.

Setting Up a Test Code

Test codes are instrument-dependent. In general, each test on an instrument
must have a unique identifier in the coding system for that instrument on the

320 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

ADVIA CentraLink system. An exception is where one test on the instrument is
matched to more than one test on the ADVIA CentraLink system. In this case,
each test is uniquely identified on the ADVIA CentraLink system by the same
type. For example, the ADVIA 1650 system uses the same test code for serum
and urine tests and they are differentiated by the sample type.
Upon entering a change to any field of the Test code window, a message displays
warning that modifying Code values can affect the reporting of new results.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Coding Systems.
The Coding system browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Test codes.
The Test codes in coding system browser window displays.
4. Select New on the toolbar to add a new test code.
The Test codes editor window displays.
Coding system is populated automatically and refers to the coding system to
which the test belongs.
5. Enter Test.
The test value is the ADVIA CentraLink system test name.
6. Enter Value.
This code is the value recognized by the LIS/LAS/instrument.
The sample type value of the test populates the Sample type field. This field
is not enabled for entry. This value is a reference to the sample type to which
this code is restricted.
7. Select OK.

Setting up a Sample Type Code

In the ADVIA CentraLink software default setup, the sample type “serum” is
identified with the string “Serum.” A LIS might use the abbreviation “Sr” to denote

321
 the serum sample type. If this occurs, you can create a sample type code that
associates the abbreviation “Sr” with the ADVIA CentraLink system’s serum.
NOTE: If you do not specify a LIS code for serum, the ADVIA CentraLink system
expects the LIS to use and understand the ADVIA CentraLink system identifier
“Serum.”
Upon entering a change to any field of the Sample type code window, a message
displays warning that modifying Code values can affect the reporting of new
results.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Coding Systems.
The Coding system browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Sample type
codes.
The Sample type codes in coding system browser window displays.
4. Select New on the toolbar to add a new sample type code.
The Sample type code editor window displays.
Coding system is populated automatically and refers to the coding system to
which the test belongs.
5. Enter the Sample type.
6. Enter the Value.
This code is the value recognized by the LIS, LAS, and instrument.
7. Enter Match order.
Match Order is an integer value used when a single code value is mapped to
multiple sample types and unsolicited results are uploaded from the
instrument. The ADVIA CentraLink system picks up the mapping with the
lowest match order.
8. Select OK.

Setting Up a Container Type Code

Container type codes associate container types with coding systems.

322 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Coding Systems.
The Coding system browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Container type
codes.
The Container type codes in coding system browser window displays.
4. Select New on the toolbar to add a new container type code.
The Container type code editor window displays.
Coding system is populated automatically and refers to the coding system to
which the test belongs.
5. Select OK after entering the relevant field values.

Setting Up a Species Code

If the LIS does not specify species codes in a workorder, the workorder in the
ADVIA CentraLink system has a question mark in the species field indicating
species unspecified. If the lab only handles specimens from humans, you do not
have to specify a species. The understanding is that every sample with species
unspecified is human. When a lab processes more than one species, however,
you must enter species codes.
Upon entering a change to any field of the Species code window, a message
displays warning that modifying Code values can affect the reporting of new
results.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Coding Systems.
The Coding system browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Related > Species.
The Species codes in coding system browser window displays.
4. Select New on the toolbar to add a new species code.
The Species code editor window displays.
Coding system is populated automatically and refers to the coding system to
which the test belongs.

323
 5. After entering the relevant field values, select OK.

Defining Sample Sources

NOTE: You can define sample sources and set up sample source codes in the
ADVIA CentraLink software. The ADVIA CentraLink software, however, does not
currently support connectivity to microbiology instruments.
Some microbiology instrument types require the exchange of sample source
data, which is also known as body part location data. For example, to store body
part location data on where a sample was phlebotomized, the sample source
data may be "my left foot." While the ADVIA CentraLink software allows you to
configure sample source data, you cannot display sample source information
through the Sample editor or browser windows. Complex datatypes and sample
source data are transmitted directly from the LIS to the instruments and from the
instruments back to the LIS. You cannot view or manually alter the results.
Initially you define a sample source through the Sample source editor window.
The description field enables you to store body type location information for
microbiology instruments. After this sample source data is defined, you can link it
to the appropriate coding system.
Access the Sample source editor window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Sample sources.
The Sample source browser window displays.
2. Double-select any entry.

324 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Sample source editor window displays.

Field Description
Name Unique identifier of the sample source.
Description Free text description of the sample source.

Setting Up a Sample Source Code

NOTE: You can define sample sources and set up sample source codes in the
ADVIA CentraLink software. The ADVIA CentraLink software, however, does not
currently support connectivity to microbiology instruments.
Sample source codes associate sample sources with the appropriate coding
system. For example, in coding system CS, sample source Left Knee is
represented by code value MGE.
When linked, the ADVIA CentraLink software can match internal and external
sample source identifiers during communication with external applications.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Coding Systems.
The Coding system browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate instrument.
3. Right-select the selected instrument and select Sample source code.

325
 The Sample source code window displays.

Field Description
Coding system Reference to the coding system that contains the code.
Sample source Reference to the sample source that is identified by the
code.
Value Code identifying the sample source within the coding
system.

326 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Configuring Patient Locations
The Patient locations browser window lists the locations that can be associated
with a patient.
1. From the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Patient locations.
The Patient locations browser displays.
2. To add a new Patient location, select New on the toolbar.
The Patient location editor window displays.

3. Enter the appropriate information and select OK.

Field Description
Name Unique identification for the location.
Description Description of the location.

327
Configuring a Report Model
Report models are templates for reports. Report models allow you to configure
header, body, and footer information. If a report model is not defined, a default
report style is used.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Configuration > Report models.
The Report model browser window displays.
2. To add a new Report model, select New on the toolbar.
The Report model editor window displays.

Field Description
Name Unique identifier for the report model.
Comment Full name or explanation of the report model.

328 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Fax Header When sending a fax and the Via fax checkbox at the
Report window is selected, the
ReportModel.FaxHeader text is added as the header.
Header Unique identifier or name for the report header/title.
Column Heading List List of column headings separated by commas.
Column type list List of column types separated by commas. The order
of the column types corresponds to the order of the
headings in the Column heading list field. The following
column types are available:
• Description: description of test
• Name: test name (mnemonic)
• Norm: Applicable normal range
• Severity: associated severity
• Unit: units or measure for the displayed results
• ValidationUser: login name of validating user
• Value: result value
• Validation Date/Time: date and time of result
validation.
• Instrument: instrument on which the validation was
performed.
Footer Unique identification or name for the report footer.

Define a report model through the report model editor window by completing the
following steps:
1. Enter or modify the Name and Comment.
2. Double-select Header.
The Texts based on table browser window displays. You can select from the
available header designations. If you need a customized header, contact your
local service provider for assistance.

329
 Right-select the selected header and select Preview to display the header.
3. Double-select Column heading list.
The Multi-lingual text editor window displays.
a. Select New to create a new column heading list or Edit to modify an
existing one.
b. Enter or modify the comma-separated list of column headings in the
bottom Editor field.
The list of headings must be in the same order as the list of column types.
c. Select a language.
d. Select Save to record the list in the Report model editor.
4. In the Column type list field, specify each column type in a comma-separated
list using only the specified types.
NOTE: The order of the column types must correspond to the order of the
column headings.
5. Double-select Footer.
The Texts based on table browser window displays. You can select from the
available footer designations. If you need a customized footer, contact your
local service provider or distributor for assistance.
6. Select OK.
NOTE: For information on printing a report, see Generating a Sample Report‚
page 86 and Generating QC Reports‚ page 220. For information on assigning a
report model to a physician, see Accessing Physician Records‚ page 239. For
information on setting a report model as the default, see Customizing Reports‚
page 398.

330 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Defining Print Commands
The following print commands exist on the Record menu:
• Print – When you select Print, ADVIA CentraLink software automatically
prints a copy of the open browser to the default printer.
• Print... – When you select Print..., the Output options window displays.
Through the Output options window, you can choose among several print
options before printer.
Access the Output options window:
1. At the toolbar, select Record > Print....
The Output options editor window displays.

Field Description
Selection only If selected, print only the selected records.

331
 Field Description
Device type The options include the following: File, Terminal,
Printer, Clipboard, Excel, or Word.
The default for printing is Printer.
Format The options include the following: Text or HTML.
Printer Reference to the printer to which output is directed.
Set as default If selected, allows you to save the value in the Printer
field as the default user printer.
Directory Target location for generated files.
File Name of the generated target file.
Copies Number of copies to be printed.

332 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 System Management

Section 4:System Management

Setting Up Users and Security ..........................................................335
Adding New Users .........................................................................335
Assigning Privileges .....................................................................342
Adding Functions to a Privilege ..................................................343
Adding Users to a Privilege ..........................................................345
Protecting Table and Field Data ...................................................347
Auditing Database Tables ..................................................................349
Viewing Audit Logs .......................................................................352
Checking Log Files and Starting and Stopping the Server ............358
Using Progress Explorer ..............................................................359
Manually Stopping the Database .................................................359
Manually Starting the Database ...................................................360
Understanding the Watchdog Service and Dashboard ...................361
Watchdog Service .........................................................................361
Watchdog Dashboard ..................................................................362
Configuring the Watchdog Service and Dashboard ........................368
Starting Watchdog Service Independent of Other Services .....368
Configuring Watchdog Dashboard ..............................................371
Checking Database Storage ..............................................................375
Purging Data from the Database ..................................................377
Scheduling Tasks ...............................................................................378
Backing Up and Restoring the Software ..........................................380
Backing Up the Databases ...........................................................380
Performing a Backup ....................................................................382
Compatibility of Backup Tapes ....................................................383

333
 Restoring the Databases from a Tape Backup ...........................384
Restoring the Databases from a Disk Backup ............................387
Selecting and Adding Languages .....................................................391
Understanding User Interface Languages ..................................391
Changing User-Defined Languages ............................................391
Defining Languages for Users .....................................................393
Setting the Language for Add-on Programs ...............................393
Printing ................................................................................................395
Customizing Reports ....................................................................398
Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................399
Troubleshooting .................................................................................402
Error Messages .............................................................................402
Troubleshooting and Tips ............................................................403

334 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Setting Up Users and Security
You can add users to the ADVIA CentraLink system and assign different
privileges to them.

Adding New Users

Set up new users with a login name, password, and other settings:
1. Log on as System Manager.
2. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Security > Users.
The Active users window displays.

3. At the toolbar, select the New icon or at the keyboard, press Insert.

335
 The User editor window displays.

Field Description
Initials User’s initials.
Last name User’s last name.
First name User’s first name.
Login name Unique identifier for the user. When a user first logs in
to the ADVIA CentraLink system, the password is the
same as this login name.
Type Possible values in increasing order of authority are
Guest, User, System manager, and Developer.
Siemens strongly recommends that you select “User”
as the type for all operators. For more information on
using types, see Assigning Privileges‚ page 342.
Language User’s preferred language. This setting overrides the
site default specified in application-level settings.
Enabled Determines whether or not a user is allowed to log in.
You cannot delete user records. Mandatory field entry.

336 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Autologin allowed Allows a user to log on without a password.
Minimum password Minimum number of characters in the logon password.
length This setting overrides the site default specified in
application-level settings. It is not applicable to system
managers or developers. The Maximum length is 20
characters.
Maximum password The maximum age of a password, measured in days.
age This setting overrides the site default specified in
application-level settings. It is not applicable to system
managers or developers. Mandatory field entry.
Start function Function that is activated automatically every time the
user logs in. For example, you can set the system to
open the Review and Edit window at start up.
Start function param Specifies the parameter set to be used for the Start
set function.
Authorization timeout Maximum time in seconds that a user can refrain from
interacting with the application. This setting overrides
the site default specified in application-level settings.
Mandatory field entry.
Context timeout Maximum time in seconds that a user can leave the
password dialog unattended. This setting overrides the
site default specified in application-level settings.
Printer Default printer for the user.
E-mail address User’s email address.
Mail method User’s preferred mail receipt method. Valid settings are
Internal (through ADVIA CentraLink system built-in
mail), External (through Internet), or both.

337
 Setting a User Password
If you assign a password to a user, the user must type it in the password field on
the Logon window when logging on.
Define a user password on the User window:
1. Right-select and select Change Password.
2. Enter the new password.
The system has a six password memory; you cannot reuse a password until it
has been changed six times.
3. Enter the password again in the verification field.
4. Select OK.

Assigning Printers to a User

At the Active user’s browser window, the Printers right-select option allows you to
assign printers to a given user.
NOTE: User’s of type System Manager cannot assign their own printers;
however, user’s of type System Manager can assign printers to other System
Managers.
Assign a preferred list of printers to a user:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Security > Users.
The Active users window displays.
2. Highlight the user to whom who want to assign printers.
3. At the highlighted user entry, right-select the user and select Related >
Printers.
The Printer assignment browser window displays.
4. At the toolbar, select the New icon or at the keyboard, press Insert.

338 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Printer assignment editor window displays.

5. In the Printer field at the Printer assignment editor window, double-select the
? symbol.

339
 The Printers browser window displays and lists all of the printers defined to
the system.

6. At the Printers browser window, select the printers that will be assigned to the
given user.

340 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

7. After the appropriate printers are selected, select OK.
The Printer assignments window displays and lists each of the printers that is
assigned to the given user.

8. At the Printer assignments window, select Close.

The Active users window displays.
The printers are assigned to the user. When the user accesses the Printers
browser window, the Show my printers only checkbox must be selected in
order to view the preferred printer list assigned to the user. Refer to At the
menu bar, select Start > System management > Printers.‚ page 395.

About System Managers

You can set up multiple users as System Manager. For each System Manager
you add, we recommend you specify an email address. System Managers can
receive email alerts from the Watchdog monitoring program. For more
information, see Watchdog Service Alerts‚ page 361.

341
 Assigning Privileges
You can create privileges and associate them with operators, functions, and data.
The high level steps for assigning privileges are as follows:
1. Add new operators as type User.
2. Add a new privilege.
3. Define the privilege by adding functions and data to it.
This is known as protecting the functions and data. If functions and data are
assigned to a privilege, no operator of type “User” has access to them unless
assigned to the privilege.
4. Assign an operator to the privilege, giving the operator access to the
functions and data.
NOTE: The following users types are not associated with privileges: Guest,
System Manager, and Developer. Guests are never granted any privileges.
System managers and developers never require any privileges. Only for the
generic type User are privileges taken into account.
Each function has a minimal user type assigned to it. This is the minimal authority
or experience level a user has to activate that function.
Consider the following table that depicts the relationship among functions,
privileges, and users.

Functions Privileges Users

Order Entry Advanced Marit
Sample Validation Manager Steven
Result Entry Senior Lieven
Physician

Functions are assigned to privileges and then users are assigned to privileges. In
the above scenario, only a user assigned to “Senior” can validate a sample. You
can assign one function or one user to two different privileges.

342 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Adding a Privilege
1. Log on as the System Manager.
2. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Security >
Privileges.
3. Select New on the toolbar.
4. Type in a Name that is the unique identification of the privilege.
5. Select OK.

Adding Functions to a Privilege

You can associate a privilege with data or functions to protect them from
unauthorized user access. You can subsequently assign privileges to users to
grant them access to the data and functions that the privilege protects.
NOTE: Whenever you add a function to a privilege, it is protected from all users;
that is, the function is not available to users of type “User” until you assign a user
to the privilege.
1. Log on as the System Manager.
2. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Security >
Privileges.
The Privileges browser window displays.
3. Select the appropriate privilege.
4. Right-select the selected privilege and select Functions Protected.
A list of functions currently protected by the privilege displays. Functions are
identified by the combination of a table and a mnemonic.
5. Select New on the toolbar.

343
 The Function Privilege window displays.

6. Double-select the Function table.

A list of database table names displays.
7. Select the table that contains the function.
8. Double-select the Function mnemonic.
A list of Methods displays.
NOTE: The Privilege field is automatically populated with name of the
privilege you are modifying.
9. Select OK.

344 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Adding Users to a Privilege
After you have assigned functions to a privilege, you can assign users to allow
them access to those functions.
1. Log on as the System Manager.
2. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Security >
Privileges.
The Privileges window displays.
3. Select the appropriate privilege.
4. Right-select the selected privilege and select Privileged Users.
A list of users currently assigned to the privilege displays.
5. Select New on the toolbar.
The User’s Privilege window displays.
6. Double-select User to select from the Users window.
7. Select OK.
The next time the user logs on, the privilege is in effect.

Default Functions for All Users

By default, users have access to the following basic functions:
• DeltaNorm – Comment, Eligible, Species, Test
• Instrument – Tests
• Method – QCPopulations
• Norm – AgeUnit, Comment, Eligible, Method, Species, Test
• PanelMember – Requestable
• PanelRequestable – Members
• Patient – Age, Species
• Physician – ReportModel
• QCLot – DeepCopy, QCPopulations, Report
• QCPopulation – LeveyJenningsGraph, Lot, Method, Recalculate, Report,
Results, SetReference

345
 • QCResult – Population
• Request – CheckResult, DiscontinuationUser, Discontinue, EditComment,
Invalidate, Patient, Rerun, Results, Revert, Sample, UploadUser, Validate,
ValidationUser, ViewImage
• Requestable – PanelMembership
• Result – AvailabilityUser, AddComment, Method, Request, ViewImage,
ScheduleUser
• Sample – CheckResults, DiffPad, Patient, PatientLocation, Physician,
Report, Requests, Rerun, ReviewAndEdit, Type, UploadResults, ViewImage
• SampleType – Description
Services – CheckActivity
• Site – Calculator, Calendar, InstrumentsByName, OrderEntry,
PatientsByLastNameFirstName, PhysiciansByLastNameFirstName,
QCLotsByNumber, QCPopulationQuery, RequestablesByMnemonic,
ResultEntry, SampleQuery, SamplesByIdentifier, SampleTypesByMnemonic,
ServicesByName, SpeciesByName, TestsByMnemonic, ReviewAndEdit
• Species – Patients
• Test – Instruments, Norms, SampleType, ResultChoices, DeltaNorms,
Requestables

Using the Default Advanced Privilege

The Advanced privilege is shipped with the ADVIA CentraLink system but must
be granted to users before they have access to advanced functions.
Display the list of functions associated with the Advanced privilege by completing
these steps:
1. Log on as the System Manager.
2. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Security >
Privileges.
The Privileges window displays.
3. Select the Advanced privilege.
4. Right-select to access the list of protected fields, functions, and tables.

346 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Protecting Table and Field Data
You can associate privileges with individual database tables and fields to protect
them from unauthorized viewing, modification, or both.
Control access to a table by specifying table and the type of access to restrict:
1. Create or select a privilege to associate with access to the table.
2. Right-select and select Tables protected.
3. Enter the Table.
4. Enter the Type of access to restrict.
NOTE: The Privilege field is automatically populated with name of the
privilege you are modifying.
5. Select OK.
Control access to a field by specifying the field name, field table, and type of
access that you want to restrict:
1. Create or select a privilege to associate with access to the field.

347
 2. Right-select and select Fields protected.

3. Enter the Field name.

4. Enter the Field table.
5. Enter the Type of access to restrict.
NOTE: The Privilege field is automatically populated with name of the
privilege that you are modifying.
6. Select OK.

348 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Auditing Database Tables
Auditing provides a means of tracking the history of database tables. When
auditing on a table is enabled, each of the transaction records of the table is
saved to an audit log file. Auditing is performed at the table record level. User
actions are audited; batch actions are not audited.
You can specify which tables to audit from a predefined list. The following actions
can be tracked:
• Sample deletion
• Sample omission
• QC result omission
• QC result reinstatement
• QC severity resetting
• QC population modification
• QC Lot Modification
• Request omission
• Request deletion
• Result Editing
• User account modification
• Modifications to the Norms
• Modifications to Flags
• Modifications to the Delta Norms
• Modification to MISPLs
• Modifications to Calculations
• Modifications to Texts Table
• Modifications to the Coding Systems
• Modification to Commands
• Modifications to Tasks
• Modification to Units and Dimensions
• Modification to Aspects
• Modification to Container type

349
 • Modification to Instrument records
• Modification to Instrument Groups
• Modification to Test Groups
• Modification to Requestables
• Modification to Patients
• Modification to Patient Location
• Modification to Physicians
• Modification to Sample Types
• Modification to Species
• Modification to Specific-Self (Options)
• Test and Method table modification
• Audit Trail purge
The tables that are audited by default are listed as follows:
• Aspect
• bt_ActualFunctionParameter
• bt_ActualFunctionParameterSet
• bt_ActualQueryParameter
• bt_ActualQueryParameterSet
• bt_Command
• bt_Task
• CodingSystem
• ContainerType
• ContainerTypeCode
• DeltaNorm
• DilutionCondition
• Dimension
• gp_Site
• gp_SiteFunction
• gp_Text
• Instrument

350 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

• InstrumentCode
• InstrumentFlag
• InstrumentGroup
• lg_Type
• Method
• Norm
• PanelMember
• PanelRequestable
• Patient
• PatientLocation
• Physician
• QCLot
• QCPopulation
• QCResult
• Request
• Requestable
• Result
• Sample
• SampleSource
• SampleSourceCode
• SampleType
• SampleTypeCode
• sc_User
• SimpleRequestable
• Species
• SpeciesCode
• SpecificSelf
• Test
• TestCode
• TestGroup

351
 • Unit
Audit logs contain the following information:
• Changed fields with From and To values
• Date and time the change was made
• User who initiated the change
• Action performed by the user who initiated the change
Audit information can be exported and can be purged. Automated tasks,
executed by the user “Batch,” are excluded from auditing.
NOTE: User actions are audited, batch actions are not audited.

Viewing Audit Logs

You can view a list of the logging activity that pertains to a specified user, table, or
both through the Log Entries window.
Access the Log entries window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Logging> Audit
Overview.

352 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Audit overview query window displays.

Field Description
From Parameter that limits the display of audit log entries to
those that have a date stamp value equal to or greater
than this From date value.
This is a required field.
NOTE: The number of days between the From date and
the To date values cannot exceed 60 days.
To Parameter that limits the display of audit log entries to
those that have a date stamp value less than or equal
to this To date value.
NOTE: The number of days between the From date and
the To date values cannot exceed 60 days.
User Parameter that limits the display of audit log entries to
those initiated by this user.
NOTE: Either a User or Table name value must be
entered.
Table Parameter that limits the display of audit log entries to
those applicable to this table.
NOTE: Either a User or Table name value must be
entered.
2. After entering the parameters, select OK.

353
 The Log entries window displays.

The audit information that displays is restricted to meet the audit query
parameters entered to the Audit overview query window. The parameters for
this restricted audit set apply until the current Log entries window session
ends.
Field Description
Creation Time Displays the creation date of a log entry.
S Displays the severity of the entry.
Login Displays the name of the user.

354 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Table Name Displays the name of the table for which the audit log is
generated.
Name Displays the log type of the audit log.
Description Displays the transaction details of the record within the
audited table.
User name Displays the full name of the user.
Log Type Area
Name Displays the name of the log type.
Enable If selected, indicates whether this type of log is currently
enabled.
Log Process Area
Name The name of the program that initiates the logging
process.
Final If selected, this checkbox Indicates whether the logging
process is closed for the log file and thereby finalized.
Creation time Displays the creation time of the log file.
Expire date Displays the expiration date of the log file.
Disposition Area If selected, restricts the displayed list of audit log entries
Limit to selected to the transaction records within the current view that
record pertain to the currently selected record.
NOTE: The display of audit log entries is refreshed from
the transaction records that display in the current view,
not from all applicable transaction records stored in the
database.

355
 Field Description
Group by record If selected, groups all transaction records within the
current view to the record to which the transaction audit
log entries apply. Groups of transaction records are
distinguished from each other by a different background
display after each transaction group.
For example, within the current view, all records that
pertain to User A would be grouped together against a
white background; all records that pertain to User B
would be grouped together and these records would be
distinguished from those of the previous group with a
grey background; all records that pertain to User C
would be grouped together against a white background,
and so on.
Show subject record If selected, transfers control to the applicable editor
window in which the transaction was entered and saved
and displays the details of the transaction record within
this editor window.
NOTE: If the first record of the transaction record
grouping is a deleted record and you select Show
subject record, the corresponding editor window does
not display because the deleted record does not exist.
Export to browser If selected, exports the displayed audit log data to an
XML-based file that can be printed.
Options If selected, displays the Audit overview query window,
which allows for you to update the parameters of the
query.
Upon redisplay of the Log entries window, the audit log
data is refreshed to reflect records that meet the
entered audit criteria.
Refer to Entering Auditing Criteria that Restricts the Log
Entries Display‚ page 357.

356 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Close If selected, the Log entries window closes.

Entering Auditing Criteria that Restricts the Log Entries Display

Through the Audit overview query window, you can restrict the audit information
that displays within the Log entries window to that which meets specified audit
criteria.
Access the Audit overview query window:
1. At the Log entries window, select Options.
The Audit overview query window displays.
For details on the parameters of the Audit overview query window, refer to
Viewing Audit Logs‚ page 352.
2. After entering the parameters, select OK.
The refreshed (Audit Overview) Log entries window displays.
The audit information that displays is restricted to meet the audit query
parameters entered to the Audit overview query window. The parameters for
this restricted audit set apply until the current (Audit Overview) Log entries
window session ends.

357
Checking Log Files and Starting and Stopping the Server
The ADVIA CentraLink system maintains log files that track database activity.
You can monitor the log files and then stop and re-start the ADVIA CentraLink
software and its databases.
In the Log Folder field of the General tab of the system Options window, a root
folder directory for all log files is specified. This root folder contains subfolders for
service logs, which are named svc, and translator logs, which are named trl,
respectively. These subfolders are again subdivided in subfolders dedicated to
individual services and translators. If the ? symbol is specified in the Log Folder
field of the General tab of the system Options window, the log file folder defaults
to <CentraLink>\log.
The ADVIA CentraLink system server is the computer containing the
ADVIA CentraLink databases:
• Genro: Generic, Read-only data (for example, scheme info)
• CentraLink: Specific, Read-write data (for example, tests, samples, etc.)
These databases are installed as part of the ADVIA CentraLink application and
are in Progress database format. Some Progress commands, including the
Progress Explorer Tool, display in your Start menu. The Progress Explorer Tool
allows you to manually start or stop the two databases that the ADVIA CentraLink
system uses.
During the ADVIA CentraLink system installation procedure, the databases are
set up to automatically start and stop upon system startup and shutdown.
However, you may need to manually start or stop the database. For example, you
may need to stop the database to upgrade the ADVIA CentraLink system to a
newer version then restart it after the upgrade is complete.
In addition to starting and stopping the database servers, other services, such as
those used for instrument communication, need to be started and stopped as
well.
If changes are made to a translator, for example, you must stop and start the
translator for the changes to take effect.
CAUTION: Be sure to stop all the ADVIA CentraLink system services before
making any system changes, such as changing the system date and time.

358 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Using Progress Explorer
The Progress Explorer Tool allows you to manually start and stop the databases.
When you start Progress Explorer, you must be connected to the
ADVIA CentraLink system server running the databases. This is the server where
AdminService for Progress 10.1C is running. This software is installed on the
server during the installation or upgrade process.

Manually Stopping the Database

1. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Services >
Shutdown.
2. Exit all interactive ADVIA CentraLink sessions on the server and on the client
workstations.
3. Shut down all databases:
a. At the menu bar, select Start > Programs > OpenEdge > Progress
Explorer Tool.
b. Using the tree view, go to the ADVIA CentraLink databases: Console
Root > Progress Explorer > localhost > Databases.
c. Right-select the SampleNet database and select Stop.
Repeat these shutdown procedures for the CentraLinkgenro database.

359
 Manually Starting the Database
You must start the ADVIA CentraLink server from the computer on which the
ADVIA CentraLink server software is installed. Do not start the server from any
other computer.
1. Start all databases:
a. At the ADVIA CentraLink server Windows Start menu, select Programs >
OpenEdge > Progress Explorer Tool.
b. Using the tree view, go to the ADVIA CentraLink databases: Console
Root > Progress Explorer > localhost > Databases.
c. Right-select the Samplenet database and select Start.
Repeat these startup procedures for the CentraLinkgenro database.
2. Start the services and translators on the ADVIA CentraLink session server:
a. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Services >
Startup.
This procedure only starts services and translators with the AutoStart attribute
selected. Verify that services and translators are selected correctly. You must
start any unselected required services and translators individually.

360 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Understanding the Watchdog Service and Dashboard
You can automatically monitor communication with the LIS, ADVIA Automation,
and analysis instruments using the Watchdog service and the Watchdog
Dashboard.

Watchdog Service
The Watchdog service is a background program that monitors connectivity and
availability. The Watchdog service monitors the following items:
• Connection status of translator services and their associated translators
• Availability of the LIS FTP service
• Connection status of the Database server
• Availability of space on disk drive used for image storage
All incoming information is gathered, interpreted, and dispatched to the
Watchdog Dashboards. Information related to connectivity and availability is
posted as messages in the Message log of the Dashboard and are broadcast as
alerts via email to system managers.

Watchdog Service Alerts

The Watchdog service can be configured to alert every ADVIA CentraLink
system user of type System Manager. Alerts are sent as messages displayed to
the Dashboard, as emails, or as both.
To receive alerts as emails, you as system manager must specify the mail server,
mail port, and your email address on the Mail tab of the system Options window.
NOTE: A system manager receives a Windows messenger alert if the system
manager’s login name to the ADVIA CentraLink software is the same as the
system manager’s login name to Windows.
The Watchdog service generates alerts under the following conditions:
• When a service remains in status Undetermined for more than 50 seconds
• When a translator remains in status Disconnected for more than 10 seconds

361
 Watchdog Dashboard
The Watchdog Dashboard connects to the Watchdog service. Through its
graphical interface, the Watchdog Dashboard displays the monitoring results of
the Watchdog service.
The Watchdog Dashboard displays the status of communication with the
connected translator services and translators and displays log messages. You
can filter the displayed translator services and translators by name or by
instrument group.
Through the Send QC Warnings to Watchdog checkbox on the Watchdog tab of
the system Options window, you can configure sending QC severity change
messages to the Watchdog Dashboard.

362 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

To access the Watchdog Dashboard:
1. Select the Dashboard icon on your desktop.
The Dashboard window displays.

Translator services are located on the left side of the Watchdog Dashboard
window. The associated translators are located on the right.

Dashboard Toolbar
The Watchdog Dashboard window toolbar contains the following:
• About button - Displays the About dialog box, which displays product version
and copyright information.
• View button - As per a dropdown menu selection, allows you to sort the
display of services and translators as follows:

363
 - Show all items - Displays all the services and translators.
- Hide inactive - Displays only the active services and translators.
- Show specific set - Displays services and translators by instrument group.
• Setup button - Accesses the Watchdog Dashboard Preferences window.
Through the Watchdog Dashboard Preferences window, you can configure
the Watchdog Dashboard to connect at Watchdog startup to a specific host
and port, which is the default and is recommended, or to search for and
display all available Watchdog services on the network upon Watchdog
Dashboard startup.
• Filter field - As per translator name values entered to this field, you can filter
the display of translator service and translator information by translator name.

Dashboard Tabs
The Watchdog Dashboard window consists of two tabs: Communication Monitor
tab and Message Log tab.

Communication Monitor Tab

Translator servers and their associated translators display on the Communication
Monitor tab of the Watchdog Dashboard. You can filter the display of this
translator information by name or by instrument group.
On a given row of the Watchdog Dashboard, the leftmost rectangle represents
the translator service and the rectangles that follow in the same row represent the
associated translators.
Message Handling and Alert Display
Warnings, errors, and alerts display as follows:
• Light bulb icons - Upon receipt of an QC message alert, a light bulb icon
displays in the translator service or translator rectangle. When you select the
light bulb icon, the message displays in the Information text area at the
bottom of the Watchdog Dashboard window.
• I icon - Displays when your mouse hovers over the a service or translator on
the Communications tab. When you click on the corresponding rectangle on
which the I icon displays, data display in the Information panel is refreshed
with information that pertains to the corresponding service or translator.
• Messenger service alert window - Displays upon disconnect of a service,
translator, or ftp server and when limited space on the hard drive is detected.

364 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Starting and Stopping Translator Services and Translators
If you logged into Windows with a user account that has the privileges to start and
stop services, you can start and stop services and translators from the Watchdog
Dashboard.
At the Watchdog Dashboard, you can start and stop the translator services and
translators from the following two areas:
• Translator service and translator rectangle - By right-selecting an individual
rectangle and selecting start or stop, you can start or stop the corresponding
translator service or translator.
• Information panel - By selecting a translator service or translator, you can
isolate and display the data of individual translator services and translators at
the information panel at the bottom of the window. At the information panel,
you can start and stop translator services and translators by selecting Start or
Stop in the Actions area.
Refer to Start and Stop Translator Services and Translators‚ page 374.

365
 Status of Communication
The status of communication with the connected servers and translators displays
through color codes.
Color Service Status / Meaning Translator Status / Meaning
Green Active Active
Sent activity confirmation less Started and connected to
than 1 minute ago. external application.
Gray Inactive Inactive
Defined in database, but not Defined in database, but not
started. started.
Red Undetermined Disconnected
Did not send an activity Started but not connected to
confirmation for more than one external application.
minute because the service is NOTE: Translators that use FTP
inactive or busy. as the low-layer protocol, for
example, the LMX LIS translator,
do not have a status of
Connected or Disconnected.
The status of these translators is
either Active or Inactive.

QC Severity Messages
Through the Send QC Warnings to Watchdog checkbox on the Watchdog tab of
the system Options window, you can configure sending QC severity change
messages to the Watchdog Dashboard.
These QC severity message displays are compatible with both Normal and
Concentrator instrument types.
For QC messages from a concentrator translator, the value of the sender is the
name of the concentrator translator; the warning displays as a light bulb icon on
the concentrator translator rectangle. Upon selecting the light bulb icon on the
concentrator translator rectangle, the QC message text displays in the
Information area of the Watchdog Dashboard and contains a reference to the
normal instrument.

366 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

If the ADVIA CentraLink QC severity is 0, then the QC message displays as
severity information in the Information panel and also as log messages in the
Message Log tab.
If the ADVIA CentraLink QC severity is greater than 0, then the QC message
displays as a severity warning in the Information panel and also as log messages
in the Message Log tab.

Message Log Tab

Log messages and QC messages display in a table format on the Message Log
tab of the Dashboard.
You can select the header of each column of the log table to sort the log message
display.
The Log tab lists the most recent postings to the message log. A scrollbar
displays as required.
By selecting a given log message row, you can isolate and display the data of the
log messages at the information panel at the bottom of the window.

367
Configuring the Watchdog Service and Dashboard
Starting Watchdog Service Independent of Other Services
The Watchdog Startup window allows you to configure a control service that
communicates with the Dashboard. Unless the control service is started
manually, the control service starts automatically when the Watchdog starts.
To start the Watchdog service independent of other services, do the following:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Services >
Watchdog > Start.
The Start window displays.

Field Description
Log file keep The recommendation is to leave this field value defined
as the ? symbol.
NOTE: The field value on this Start window is not used.
Your technical support provider configures this value in
the watchdog.dashboard.log4j.properties file.
Log file keep is the numerical value associated with the
unit of time in which the log file is kept.

368 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Log file keep unit The recommendation is to leave this field value defined
as the ? symbol.
NOTE: The field value on this Start window is not used.
Your technical support provider configures this value in
the watchdog.dashboard.log4j.properties file.
The unit of time in which the log file is kept.
Log file keep is expressed in the Log file keep unit. It
determines how long log files will be kept. After the
specified period, they are automatically deleted to
preserve disk space.
Log file max size The recommendation is to leave this field value defined
as the ? symbol.
NOTE: The field value on this Start window is not used.
Your technical support provider configures this value in
the watchdog.dashboard.log4j.properties file.
This maximum log file size is expressed in megabytes.
Specifies the maximum size to which the log file can
increase before the log file is closed and superseded by
a new one.
Control service Mandatory field that references the service that allows
the Watchdog to start and stop other services.
The Watchdog control service must use the XML-based
internal language. You must prefix the Watchdog
control service name with "xml_" and in the Specific
options field of the Services window, set the its options
to
-O "UseLengthPrefix=YES\\MessageHandlers=
xml_amh.r".

You can view the current configuration of the Watchdog, which includes the fields
and values of the Startup window as well as the Server and Port fields, through
the Watchdog tab of the system Options window. These values can only be
changed on the Register Watchdog window or the Startup window.

369
 Registering and Unregistering Watchdog
Before you can start the Watchdog service, you must register it with Windows.
You must register Watchdog on the ADVIA CentraLink system server.
NOTE: After registering the Watchdog service, always start the Watchdog service
to avoid delays in communication with the instrument translators.
Register the Watchdog service:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Services >
Watchdog > Register.
The Register Watchdog window displays.

Field Description
Service name Name of the Windows service to be registered.
Folder The folder where the Watchdog is installed. The default
is the Watchdog subfolder of the application root folder.
Server Contains the name or IP address of the
ADVIA CentraLink system server.
Port Specifies the TCP/IP port where the Watchdog is
listening.

370 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
User login name Windows user account used to run the service. This
account does not need administrator privileges but
requires the user right “Log on as a service.” If running
in a domain, use <DomainName>\<LoginName>;
otherwise, use <ComputerName>\<LoginName>.
User password User’s Windows password.
Unregister the Watchdog service:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Services >
Watchdog > Unregister.

Starting and Stopping Watchdog

After the Watchdog is registered, you must start and stop it along with AutoStart
services and translators.
NOTE: After the Watchdog service is registered, you must always start the
Watchdog service to avoid delays in communication with the instrument
translators.
Start the Watchdog service:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Services >
Watchdog > Start.
Stop the Watchdog service:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Services >
Watchdog > Stop.

Configuring Watchdog Dashboard

Defining Watchdog Dashboard Preferences
By default, the Watchdog Dashboard takes the first available port as the Receiver
port, which is the port through which the Watchdog Dashboard receives data
from the Watchdog service.
If your lab requires incoming socket communication on fixed ports, however, then
you can assign a fixed port to the Receiver port.

371
 Access the Watchdog Dashboard Preferences window:
1. At the Watchdog Dashboard, select Setup.
The Watchdog Dashboard Preferences window displays.
NOTE: Each of the parameters defined on the Watchdog Dashboard
Preferences window is a global setting. The selections made to the Watchdog
Dashboard Preferences window affect each Watchdog Dashboard connected
to this Watchdog service.
If another Watchdog Dashboard is open and active at the time the
preferences are reset, however, the other Watchdog Dashboard does not
reflect the changed preferences until you exit this Watchdog Dashboard and
subsequently reopen this Watchdog Dashboard.

2. At the topmost radio buttons area, select Always connect to the Watchdog
Services running.
NOTE: The default option upon Watchdog Dashboard Preferences display is
Display ZeroConf-enabled discovery dialog at startup. The recommendation,
however, is to select the Always connect to the Watchdog Service running on
option in order to always connect to the Watchdog service.

372 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 If the Display ZeroConf enabled discovery dialog at startup is selected,
however, the Watchdog Service Discovery window always displays the
available Watchdog services upon Watchdog Dashboard startup.
3. At the Host field, enter the Host specified when you registered the Watchdog
service.
4. At the Port field, enter the Port specified when you registered the Watchdog
service.
NOTE: Even when the Always connect to the Watchdog Services running
field is selected, the Watchdog service discovery window displays upon
Watchdog startup if the Watchdog service is down or the Watchdog service
cannot connect to the specified host and port. Under these circumstances,
troubleshoot the problem to restart the Watchdog service and, if required,
reconfigure the port. After the issue is resolved, ensure that the Always
connect to the Watchdog Services running field is selected and restart the
Watchdog.
5. At the Default filter field, you can enter the filter by name that restricts the
default display of translator services and translators upon Watchdog
Dashboard setup.
For example, you could enter the value ADVIA to the Default filter field to
restrict the display of translator services and translators displayed by
instrument group.
6. At the Receiver port field, enter the port on which the Watchdog Dashboard
will receive the data from the Watchdog Daemon.
7. At the Purge log items older than hours field, enter 24.
Upon Watchdog Dashboard startup, log items older than 24 hours are
purged.
8. At the Purge QC warning older than days field, enter 24.
Upon Watchdog Dashboard startup, QC warnings older than 24 hours are
purged.
9. Select OK.
After you reopen the Watchdog Dashboard, selections made to the Watchdog
Dashboard Preferences window take affect.

373
 Start and Stop Translator Services and Translators
At the Dashboard, you can start and stop the translator services and translators
from the following two areas:
• Translator service and translator rectangle
• Information panel
At the translator service or translator rectangle, start or stop services and
translators as follows:
1. Right-select the corresponding translator service or translator rectangle.
2. From the dropdown menu, select Start or Stop.
At the information panel, start or stop services and translators as follows:
1. Select the translator service or translator.
At the information panel at the bottom of the window, the data of individual
translator services and translators displays.
2. In the Actions field at the Information panel, select Start or Stop.

374 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Checking Database Storage
You can manually or automatically check ADVIA CentraLink software’s database
storage size.
You can verify disk space availability, database extent usage, and database lock
table overflow risk. Disk space availability checking is only available on the
ADVIA CentraLink system server.
Verify available database storage on the server by completing the following step:
1. At the menu bar, Start > System management > Database > Check
storage.
The Check storage window displays. The system checks local disks only.

Field Description
Backup maximal days A warning is generated when more days have elapsed
passed since the latest Progress database backup than the
specified Backup maximal days passed.

375
 Field Description
Disk minimal Minimal amount of megabytes that must be available to
megabytes free prevent a warning.The recommended setting is 200.
This warning may trigger either before or after the
maximal usage value is set. For example, if you set this
value to 200 MB, and set the maximal usage to 80%,
but only 75% of the disk has been used, this warning is
triggered first.
Disk maximal Maximum percentage of used disk space to prevent a
percentage used warning. The recommended setting is 80. This warning
may trigger before or after the minimal disk space value
is set. For example, if you set this value to 80% and the
disk has 500 MB free, and minimal free megabytes is
set to 100 MB, this warning is triggered first.
Area minimal Minimal amount of megabytes that must be available
megabytes free per storage area to prevent a warning.
Area maximal Maximum percentage of used space per storage area
percentage used that must be maintained to prevent a warning.
Check overflow extent When selected, a warning message displays when the
overflow extent is in use.
Enables an advanced check on database size. The
ADVIA CentraLink system database consists of 55
extents, each of which has a 2 gigabyte limit.
Support email address Sets the system to forward a copy of the warning to the
specified address. This feature requires that an Email
host and port were configured in the email address field
of Mail tab on the system Options window.

Warnings are displayed to the current user and mailed to all enabled users of
type “System Manager.”
System managers can schedule the storage check function to run automatically.

376 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Purging Data from the Database
You can access the Purge data window through the Sample status overview
window or you can access it as a pulldown option from the System Management
function.
NOTE: As an audit log is generated and written to during the manual purge
process, system performance can be significantly degraded when initiating a
manual purge. If you purge on a regular basis, contact your local technical
support provider to configure a task, which can be scheduled to purge
automatically.
Access the Purge data window:
1. At the menu bar, Start > System management > Database > Purge data.
2. At the Sample status overview window, select Purge.
To access the window from the Sample status overview window, see Purging
Sample and Worklist Data from the Database‚ page 72.
The Purge data window displays.
Field Description
Days to keep The period of time, starting from the current date back,
for which the data is not purged.
Samples When selected, samples with status Uploaded, Omitted
or Unknown, that is, those samples without requests,
and their dependent data are purged.
Worklists When selected, worklists and their dependent data are
purged.

377
Scheduling Tasks
A task specifies that a command is launched automatically at a specific time and
perhaps on a recurring basis.
Scheduled tasks might include uploading and downloading:
• Uploading QCs to the LIS
• Automatically uploading samples to the LIS
• Download workorders to the LAS
Set up a scheduled task:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Commands >
Commands
The Commands browser window displays.
2. Select the appropriate command.
3. Right-select the selected command and select Tasks.
The Task browser window displays.
4. Select New on the toolbar.

378 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 The Task editor window displays.

5. Enter the Name value, the From value, which is the start date, and the Until
value, which is the to date.
6. Specify the Recurrence pattern information to automatically perform the
specified command.
7. Select OK.

379
Backing Up and Restoring the Software
Backing Up the Databases
Do not shut down the databases before making a backup. You can continue
working while the backup is being made. You can launch the ADVIA CentraLink
database backup utility from the ADVIA CentraLink system.
NOTE: The recommendation is to perform a database backup once a day.
To launch the ADVIA CentraLink database backup utility from the
ADVIA CentraLink system complete the following steps:
1. At the ADVIA CentraLink menu, select Start > System Management >
Database > Backup.
The ADVIA CentraLink backup utility window displays.

The Write to tape checkbox field allows for you to write the database to tape
or to file. When selected, the database backup is written to tape. When not
selected, the database backup is written to a file on disk in the path specified
within the Temporary backup directory.

380 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Default is to Write to tape; the corresponding Write to tape checkbox is
selected.
2. Ensure that the Write to tape checkbox is appropriately selected.
If the Write to Tape Then...
checkbox is...
selected the database backup is written to tape and
subsequently deleted from disk.
NOTE: The RD1000 removable disk is not treated as a
tape.
NOTE: When you select the Write to Tape checkbox,
both the database and cytograms are backed up and
written to tape.
not selected the database backup is written to a file on disk in the
path specified within the Temporary backup directory
field.
NOTE: This includes writing to the RD1000 removable
disk, which is on the PowerEdge 2900 server.
NOTE: Cytograms are only backed up when you select
the Write to Tape checkbox, which backs up the
database and cytograms and writes them to tape.
The cytograms must be backed up manually using
windows explorer or through the command prompt.
When you leave the Write to Tape checkbox
unselected, the cytograms are not backed up and are
not written to the file on disk.

3. Select Start.
Progress messages display on the screen throughout the backup process.
NOTE: When the possibility of insufficient disk space exists while performing
a manual backup, the following message displays: "You probably don't have
enough disk space on your temporary drive to do the backup. Are you sure
you want to proceed? (Y/N)"

381
 If you select Yes and sufficient disk space does not exist, the database locks.
Under these circumstances, you would have to reboot the ADVIA CentraLink
server to resolve the problem.
Always terminate the backup by selecting No.
A complete backup operation is done in several steps. Three major operations
are performed during a backup:
• A database image is written to the spare disk on the server
• The database image is written to the tape
• Cytograms are written to the tape
The current step is marked by the yellow arrow. Steps that are completed are
marked with a green check mark. A backup is successful when all check boxes
are marked with a green check mark. Steps that failed are marked with a red
cross. If a step fails, examine the log at the bottom of the backup window. A
status window displays while the data is written to the tape.
After a successful backup operation, the backup tape is ejected automatically.
Take it out and keep it in a safe place. In case of an error, you can select the Eject
button to remove the tape.

Performing a Backup
The only difference in the operation of the low-end server and the high-end
server is a minor distinction in the operation of the tape drive.
Performing a backup on the low-end server involves a waiting period. Insert the
tape and wait for the tape drive to complete its initialization. This takes
approximately 2 minutes. Wait until the Ready light has stopped flickering before
starting the ADVIA CentraLink system backup procedure.
If the backup procedure is started without waiting, the ADVIA CentraLink system
backup application reports one of the following errors: No Media or Device not
ready. If the error is posted, cancel the backup, wait for the tape drive to complete
its initialization, and restart the backup.

382 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Compatibility of Backup Tapes
The Dell PowerEdge 2900 server uses a RD1000 removable disk, not a tape.

Siemens PN Dell Model Tape Drive Tape Format Storage

for Server Capacity

084-B003-01 Dell DLT1/VS DLT IV 40/80GB

PowerEdge
2500

084-B003-02 Dell DLT1/VS DLT IV 40/80GB

and -03 PowerEdge
2600

084-B003-04 Dell DLT/VS160 VS1 80/160GB

PowerEdge
2800

084-B003-05 Dell DLT/VS160 VS1 80/160GB

PowerEdge
2800

084-B003-06 Dell DLT/VS160 VS1 80/160GB

PowerEdge
2800

084-B001-01 Dell DLT/VS160 VS1 80/160GB

PowerEdge
1800
NOTE: The DLT/VS160 is backward read compatible with the DLT Tape IV tapes
used on the DLT1/VS tape drive, which means that tapes from Dell PowerEdge
2500 or 2600 servers can be restored to the Dell PowerEdge 1800 or 2800
servers, but these tapes cannot be used for backup.

383
 The DLT/VS tape drive does not read or write to the VS1 tapes used by the DLT/
VS160 tape drive. Tapes from Dell PowerEdge 1800 or 2800 servers cannot be
restored to the Dell PowerEdge 2500 or 2600 servers.

Restoring the Databases from a Tape Backup

You can easily restore a previous database from tape using the
ADVIA CentraLink system database restore utility.
Before restoring the database, you must have a working ADVIA CentraLink
system installation. If an ADVIA CentraLink system installation was not
successful, you must reinstall the ADVIA CentraLink software from the
ADVIA CentraLink CD-ROM before restoring the database from tape.
NOTE: Restore works only with a backup from the same ADVIA CentraLink
system version. The backup version must have the first digit in the three-digit
version identification.
Ensure that no ADVIA CentraLink system client, even the one on the server, is
running when the restore operation is underway. It is not necessary to manually
shut down the databases; the restore program shuts down the databases
automatically.

384 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Step 1: Restoring the Database Images
The database images are restored first using Windows.

Windows 2000 and Windows 2003 Restore Procedure from a Tape Backup
1. At the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories > System
Tools > Backup.
2. Insert the backup tape.
If a New Import Media window displays, select Allocate this media to
Backup now and then select OK.
This window displays only when you are moving tapes from one system to
another or when the operating system was reinstalled on the server.
3. At the Backup window toolbar, select Tools > Options.
The Options window displays.
4. Select the Restore tab.
5. Select Always replace the file on my computer.
6. Select OK.
7. At the Backup window, select the Restore tab.
8. At the left pane of the restore window, select the tape named CentraLink
backup in your backup media section.
9. In the right pane, if you do not see two backup sets for the ADVIA CentraLink
system databases and cytograms, double-select CentraLink backup in the
left pane.
A catalog of the tape is made and the two sets display in the right pane.
10. Select both backup sets and select Start Restore.
A message displays prompting if you want to continue.
11. Select OK.
A message displays prompting if you want to overwrite the files.
12. Select OK.
A status window displays. Allow the restore operation to run to completion.
13. Close the Backup application.

385
 Step 2: Rebuild the Database from the Image
ADVIA CentraLink software is shipped with a utility that makes it easy to
reconstruct the database starting from the backup image that you just restored.
1. At the Windows Start menu, select Run.
2. Type d:\centralink\bin\restore.exe.
3. Select OK.
4. If the path displayed in the image file field is exactly the same as the location
where the image file is restored, you need not modify this field.
Through Windows Explorer, verify that the following files are in this location:
centralink1, centralink.inp and centralink.st. Typically the files are located in
the following directory: F:\CentraLink\Tmp\Backup. If you do not know the
temporary directory name, search for the files on another drive. Do not
confuse these files with the actual databases, each of which has an
extension: db, d1, d2, d3, b1.

386 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

5. Select Start to start rebuilding the database.
The restore operation is done in several steps. The current step is marked by
the yellow arrow. Steps that are completed are marked with a green check
mark. A restore is successful when all check boxes are marked with a green
check mark. Steps that failed are marked with a red cross.
6. If a step fails, examine the log at the bottom of the Restore window.
After a successful restore operation, the newly restored databases are
started. It can take several minutes before the databases are fully started.
Wait at least three minutes before starting the ADVIA CentraLink software
again. You did not wait long enough, if the following error message displays:
There is no server for database.

Step 3: Restoring Cytogram Images

If all paths are exactly the same in the actual ADVIA CentraLink system
installation as on the backup tape, skip this step. The images are already stored
in the correct location.
If all paths are not exactly the same in the actual ADVIA CentraLink system
installation as on the backup tape, move the images from the previous Cytogram
directory to the current Cytogram directory:
Restore cytogram images:
1. Initiated Windows Explorer.
2. Mark all files, including all subdirectories, in the old Cytogram directory.
3. Drag them into the new Cytogram directory.
4. After verification, you can delete the old cytogram directory.

Restoring the Databases from a Disk Backup

You can easily restore a previous database from a disk backup using the
ADVIA CentraLink system database restore utility.
Before restoring the database, you must have a working ADVIA CentraLink
system installation. If an ADVIA CentraLink system installation was not
successful, you must reinstall the ADVIA CentraLink software from the
ADVIA CentraLink CD-ROM before restoring the database from disk.

387
 NOTE: Restore works only with a backup from the same ADVIA CentraLink
system version. The backup version must have the first digit in the three-digit
version identification.
Ensure that no ADVIA CentraLink system client, even the one on the server, is
running when the restore operation is underway. It is not necessary to manually
shut down the databases; the restore program shuts down the databases
automatically.

Step 1: Rebuild the Database from the Image

The ADVIA CentraLink software is shipped with a utility that makes it easy to
reconstruct the database starting from the backup image that you just restored.
1. At the Windows Start menu, select Run.
2. Type d:\centralink\bin\restore.exe.
3. Select OK.
4. Copy the following 3 database backup files that are located on disk to the
default restore path directory: centralink1, centralink.inp and centralink.st.

388 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 NOTE: Typically the default restore path is F:\CentraLink\Tmp\Backup.

5. Ensure that the value in the Database image files: field is the path of the
default restore directory where you copied the database backup files.
6. Select Start to start rebuilding the database.
The restore operation is done in several steps. The current step is marked by
the yellow arrow. Steps that are completed are marked with a green check
mark. A restore is successful when all check boxes are marked with a green
check mark. Steps that failed are marked with a red cross.
7. If a step fails, examine the log at the bottom of the Restore window.
After a successful restore operation, the newly restored databases are
started. It can take several minutes before the databases are fully started.
Wait at least 3 minutes before starting the ADVIA CentraLink software again.
You did not wait long enough, if the following error message displays: There
is no server for database.

389
 8. To restore the cytograms files from disk, copy the files to the Cytogram
directory in the CentraLink folder.

390 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Selecting and Adding Languages
The ADVIA CentraLink system supports multiple languages:
• You can define a language for the user interface.
• You can define additional languages and translations for menu options and
reports.

Understanding User Interface Languages

The user interface languages, also called system languages, and their
translations include English, French, German, Dutch, Spanish, and Italian.
You can use different user interface languages concurrently. One user might use
an English client session while another user uses a French client session.

Changing User-Defined Languages

The ADVIA CentraLink system database contains a table for user-defined
languages. User-defined languages are used to qualify translations for
multilingual fields in various tables. Multilingual fields include menu option labels
and test descriptions.
You provide translations for multilingual fields. Providing translations for menu
options or toolbar button help text in any of the system languages is not required.
These are automatically translated from the built-in glossaries when you activate
a menu after database initialization.
Access the Language window:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System Management > Languages.

391
 The Languages window displays.

Field Description
Name Unique name for the language, such as French.
Code Unique identifier for the language.
System language Associated user interface language, which can be used
for retrieving translations of non-multilingual strings.

392 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Defining Languages for Users
When defining a new user, you can set the user’s language by referencing one of
the languages listed in the Language table. If a language is not defined for a user,
the language defaults to the language defined in the Language field of the
General tab on the system Options window. A user can override an assigned
language on the Logon window.

Setting the Language for Add-on Programs

Some add-on ADVIA CentraLink system components, such as backup, restore,
and Watchdog, run outside of the ADVIA CentraLink system database. Since
most of these are Windows services, their language setup is different from the
ADVIA CentraLink system language setup. Instead of using the
ADVIA CentraLink system language, they use the user language specified in
Windows.
You can set up this language apart from the Windows 2000 or Windows 2003
system language. The ADVIA CentraLink system add-ons can run in a language
different from Windows. Error messages originating from Windows, however, are
in the Windows system language. In certain cases, the language on the buttons
doesn’t match the user language.
Define the Windows user language in Windows:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > Control Panel > Regional Settings or
Regional and Language Options.

393
 The Regional Settings Properties window displays.

2. Select the appropriate language from the drop-down menu.

3. Select OK.

394 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Printing
The table of printers is a table of operating system commands that is launched
when non-graphical print jobs are run. Examples of non-graphical print jobs are
text-format sample and QC reports and generic browser printouts.
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Printers.
The Printers browser window displays.

2. To limit the display of printers to those assigned to your user name, select
Show my printers only.

395
 For information on assigning printers to a user, see Assigning Printers to a
User‚ page 338.
3. To define a new printer, select the New icon on the toolbar.
The Printer editor window displays.

Field Description
Name A unique name for the printer.

396 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Windows path Identifies a printer installed on your network; for
example :\\Centralinksvr\hplaserj.
Document types that are supported are defined by a list
of file extensions set in the MA Section of the
<CentraLink root>/bin/Progress.ini file.
Insert a line like this (the default value is “doc”):
WindowsPrintingSupportedExtensions=“txt,doc”
Top limit and These fields are not used in the ADVIA CentraLink
Left limit system.

Print command Use this field whenever a document of an unsupported

type is printed. It is an operating system command with
a placeholder ('&1') for the name of the file to be
printed:
copy &1 \\<server-name>\<printer-share-name>
Substitute <server-name> and <printer-share-name>
as appropriate.
Preamble and These fields optionally reference files to send to the
Postamble printer using the Print command, before and after the
actual file is printed. These files may contain printer-
specific directives, for example to ensure page breaks
between consecutive files.
Like the Print command field, these fields are used only
for printing non-supported file types.

397
 Customizing Reports
The ADVIA CentraLink system generates reports according to report models.
When the system generates a report, it uses the default report model from the list
of available models. Every sample or test in the report follows the default report
model unless a different model is associated with the requesting physician.
For more information on report models, see Configuring a Report Model‚
page 328.
Change the default report model by completing the following steps:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Options.
The Options editor window displays.
2. Select the More tab.
The name of the current default report model displays in Report model.
3. Double-select Report model.
The Report models window displays and lists the available models.
4. Select the appropriate report and select OK.
Report model is populated with the selected report model name.
Reports generated after this change use this report model.
NOTE: Your system administrator can establish automatic reporting by defining a
reporting command to run automatically. Commands are always associated with
a table and reference both a query, which determines the records for processing,
and a function, which determines how to process the records. The format setting
of text or HTML is specified through command parameters. When a command is
defined, your system administrator can create associated task records, which are
scheduled for execution by a task scheduler service.

398 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Customizing the Toolbars
The ADVIA CentraLink system is installed with a default set of toolbar buttons.
You can add, edit, and delete toolbar buttons.
Add a toolbar button by completing the following steps:
1. At the menu bar, select Start > System management > Menu > Toolbar
buttons.
The Toolbar buttons browser window displays.
2. Double-select an existing entry that requires editing or select the New icon on
the toolbar.

399
 The Toolbar button editor window displays.

3. Select OK after entering the relevant information.

You must log out and log back in to the ADVIA CentraLink system to view the
toolbar button modifications.

Field Description
Row Determines the relative vertical position of the button.
Sequence Determines the relative horizontal position of the
button.

400 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Field Description
Function table and Together these field values reference the function
Function mnemonic activated by the button.
Function parameter References any combinations of parameter values pre-
set configured for the function.
Label Text that displays on the button.
Help text Text that displays on the button's tool tip. The help text
is visible when the mouse is positioned over the button.
Image up, Image File names of the image the button displays when it is
down, and Image active but not pressed, pressed, and disabled. Image
disabled up is the only mandatory file name.
These image file names are located in the <root>/img
directory.
NOTE: Images and text are mutually exclusive.
Insert ruler If selected, the toolbar icon is separated from other
toolbar icons by a vertical line.
If not selected, the toolbar icon is not separated from
other icons by a vertical line.

401
Troubleshooting
The following information may be helpful in troubleshooting system problems and
in everyday operation of the ADVIA CentraLink system.

Error Messages
ADVIA CentraLink Client/Workstations Sessions
The ADVIA CentraLink system supports up to 15 open sessions at one time. If
you attempt to open more than 15 sessions, an error message displays. The
content of this message differs depending on whether the session is opened on
the ADVIA CentraLink system server or on a client/workstation. To close the error
message, press CTRL+BREAK.

Deleting Items from Tables

The following message may display if you delete an item from a table while the
browser for that table is open:
b_Base record not on file (138)
If this message displays, select OK to close the message. The system deletes
the item and no further action is necessary.

Manually Creating Workorders or Validating Results

The following message may display when you manually create workorders or
validate results:
b_SpecificSelf in use by mipssys on CON:. Wait or choose cancel to stop
If this message displays, wait a moment and it automatically closes. Do not select
Cancel, which closes the entire the ADVIA CentraLink system application.
b_sample record not on file
This error is generated when concurrently communicating with the
ADVIA 120 system and working on the ADVIA CentraLink system. Upon display
of this error, you can close the Review and Edit window, reopen the window, and
requery the same sample. The error message no longer displays when system
processing is complete.

402 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

Manually Uploading QC data to the LIS
The following message may display when you manually upload QC data to the
LIS:
Tsl$TimeOutAppl()
If this message displays, select OK to close the message. No further action is
necessary.
If message continues, contact your local technical support provider.

Transmitting Result Messages

The following message error may occur if the result message is too long to be
processed within the time specified in the LIS Translator.
Trl$TimeOut Appl() Error on LIS Upload
The suggested value for the LIS Translator Time-out is 20 seconds. If this error
continuously occurs, contact your local service provider or distributor.

Troubleshooting and Tips

QC lot results are not recognized
Problem: The ADVIA CentraLink system reports that the control does not match
a lot.
Solution: You must add each QC lot to the ADVIA CentraLink system, and you
must fill in all information about it on the QC lot window. For more information,
see QC Lots‚ page 173.

QC lot results are not recognized when the expiration date is older than the start
date.
Problem: When the ADVIA CentraLink system imports controls, it does not
check the expiration date. If control samples with an old expiration date are sent
to the ADVIA CentraLink system from an instrument, the ADVIA CentraLink
system reports that the control does not match a lot.
Solution: Using the QC Lot window, change the expiration date to a later date
than the start date. When you change the date, the ADVIA CentraLink system
recognizes the control and creates a population for it.

403
 Error message received for aspiration time
Problem: When attempting to display a list of samples based on a query for
“Aspiration time,” you may receive the error message, “Invalid range for
aspiration time.”
Solution: When filling in the Sample Query window, be sure to type in the
aspiration time in 24-hour format (for example, 20:00).

Blank Window when Uploading Sample Results

Problem: The system may displays a blank window for a few seconds while
uploading sample results.
Solution: This does not affect system operation and requires no intervention.

No QC Graph data displays for a test in the Across Controls window

Problem: When viewing QC results on the Across Controls window, the system
does not display any information for a test in the graph columns.
Problem: If a target value is specified for a test, it is used as the center point for
the QC graph calculations. However, if no target value is specified, the reference
value must be set to “Current Statistics” in order for the system to use the
reference value as the center point on the Across Controls window.
To set the reference value:
1. Open the QC Population editor for the test.
For detailed information, see Specifying Test and Instrument Parameters for a
QC Lot‚ page 176.
2. Select the appropriate QC population.
3. Right-select the selected QC Population and then select Set Reference.
4. On the Set Reference window, set the Source to Current statistics and then
select OK.

Multiple Sample Types in a Single Workorder

In some cases, the system discards some test requests when downloading
workorders from the LIS. When the LIS downloads a workorder, the
ADVIA CentraLink system LIS translator assumes the sample type of the first test
is the sample type for every subsequent test in the workorder. If any of the tests

404 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

have a different sample type, the translator discards them. Any test received with
the sample type set to the ? symbol is added to the order.

Using Symbols in Numeric Results

The ADVIA CentraLink system allows numeric results that include the > (greater
than) and < (less than) symbols. Numeric results that include the > or < symbols
are transmitted to the ADVIA CentraLink system from networked instruments or
they are manually entered. You must ensure that your LIS is capable of handling
any results that contain these symbols.

QC Monitoring for Ratio Test Results

When ratios are defined in the ADVIA CentraLink system, the recalculation of a
ratio is automatic when any input to the calculation changes through a rerun or a
manual edit. However, when you define a test as a ratio test in the
ADVIA CentraLink system, the system can no longer receive or manage QC data
for the test.
If QC monitoring for a ratio test is essential, you must change the test type to a
routine instrument-sourced test. Instrument-sourced ratio tests are not
automatically recalculated when one of the inputs is rerun or manually edited.
Therefore, if you disable a test as a ratio test (by removing the ratio calculation for
the test), you must ensure that a warning message is added to the test definition.

Images for Samples with Unknown Sample ID Numbers

The ADVIA CentraLink system rejects the results for sample records with
unknown sample ID numbers. Any associated image files, however, remain in the
FTP directory and you must manually deleted them from the system.

ADVIA 120/2120 Disposition Codes

The ADVIA CentraLink system does not display disposition codes for results from
the ADVIA 120/2120 hematology system. If a result is manually edited at the
ADVIA 120/2120 system and then sent to ADVIA CentraLink system, there is no
indication in the ADVIA CentraLink system that the result is edited. You must
make sure that the ADVIA 120/2120 system is set to Review None mode so that
you can manually edit results only in the ADVIA CentraLink system.

405
406 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide
 Index

Section 5: Index
Symbols C
? placeholder, using 32 Closing Out QC 219
A Coding systems
container type 322
Add-on programs
sample type 321
setting the language for 393
setting up 320
Advanced privilege 346 species 323
ADVIA 120 QC data, importing 220 test codes 320
ADVIA CentraLink system using 320
introduction 13 Comment tab of Request window
logging on and off 20 169
operator functions 15 Comments
system management functions appending to a request 152
16 coded comments 152
tips 39 viewing 123
toolbar 24
Component test 236
using the workspace 22
Concentrator
ADVIA Modular Automation System
overriding values 287
19
workorder processing 287
Allow on type error 121
Concentrator instrument type 281
Ambiguous result
Container type code
patient 118
setting up 322
ambiguous result
Context menus 30
patient 119
Cytogram images
Aspect, defining 276
restoring 387
Audit tab of Request window 170
Autovalidation, Configuring 311 D
Dashboard
B using 362
Backing up ADVIA CentraLink 380 Databases
Binocular icon, using 39 checking storage 375
Browser windows 27 purging data 377
restoring 384, 387

407
 restoring images 385 tutorial 20
Default privilege 346 H
Default report model Help, using 39
changing 398
How Do I (list of quick tasks) 45
Delta Norm 121
Delta norms 272 I
Diff Pad Ignored deviation count 183
using 73 Images
Dilution tab of Request window 166 viewing 131, 138
Dimension editor, using 266 Importing ADVIA 120 QC data 220
Dimension, setting 266 Instrument flags
setting 300
Double-select menus 30
viewing 137
E Instrument Groups
Editing test results 152 Creating and Modifying 330
Editor windows 27 Instrument parameters
Enter results manually 226 specifying for a QC Lot 176
Error Messages 402 Instrument tests (methods) 302
Instrument tests (methods) and flags
F
300
Feature
Instrument types
Auto-skip sample 141
Normal and Concentrator 286
Field access
Instruments
controlling 347
viewing information 280
Field data
Invalidating results 150
protecting 347
Find function, using 39 K
Flags Keyboard shortcuts 37
viewing 119, 137 L
Functions Languages
adding to privileges 343 changing 391
G defining 393
Generating 1 selecting and adding 391
setting for add-on programs 393
Getting started

408 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Index

Levey-Jennings graph using 39

about 185 Operator functions
the button bar 188 about 15
viewing 184 Operator’s Guide
Limit is absolute 121 installing on another computer 40
LIS Previous Result tab of Request Order entry 231
window 171
P
LIS software 19
Panels 276
Log file
deleting 278
checking 358
Patient locations, configuring 327
Logging on and off 20
Patients
M accessing records of 238
Menus Pending status, defined 124
context 30 Physician
double-select 30 adding a report model 240
using 26
Physicians
Merging test into a workorder 235 browsing 239
Method, setting 302 Previous test results 135
Morphology flags 268 Print Commands 240
moving average Printers
viewing 194 adding 395
N Printing (configuring printers) 395
New users Privileges
adding 335 adding 343
Normal instrument type 281 adding functions 343
Norms 269 adding users to a 345
advanced 346
O assigning 342
Omit a test 149 protecting tables and fields 347
Omitted results Progress Explorer, about 359
viewing 149
Q
Omitted status, defined 124
QC Browser
Online Guide color display 201

409
 QC Close Out 219 Report model 240
QC Data Point changing the default 398
auditing 217 configuring 328
comment 217 Reports 398
omitting 216 printing a sample report 86
reinstating 216 Request
QC Data, viewing 193 appending comments to 152
QC lot Request window 164
adding 176 Audit tab 170
specifying test and instrument Comment tab 169
parameters 176 Dilution tab 166
viewing 173, 221 LIS Previous Result tab 171
QC population query 177 Result Detail tab 165
QC population report Severity tab 168
generating QC population re- Requestables
ports. 223 adding tests to 279
QC Results creating panels for 276
QC result flags 213 Rerun
QC results advanced reruns 157
viewing 184 manual dilution 157
viewing Levey-Jennings graph Rerun status, defined 124
184 Rerunning a test 134
QC Results (Across Controls View) Restoring the database 380, 385
window 194 Restoring the database from disk
QC severity, resetting 205 387
query 102 Restoring the database from tape
question mark (?), using 32 384
Result choice editor, using 267
R
Result choices, setting 267
Ratio test 152, 236
calculation for 260 Result Detail tab of Request window
165
Rebuilding the database from an im-
age 386 Result status, defined 124
Report formats Results
selecting 240 editing 152

410 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Index

entering manually 226 viewing 47

invalidating 150 viewing standard data 54
omitting 149 Sample query window 54, 102
rerunning 134 Sample reuse period 142
reverting 135
Sample type code
selecting by status 126
setting up 321
uploading 136
Viewing associated QC results Samples
150 Dispatch to LAS 68
viewing images 131, 138 Rerun 68
viewing omitted 149 Scheduled status, defined 124
Results of request window 144 Scheduling tasks 378
electrophoresis 144, 150 Security
Revert to previous result 135 setting up 335
Review and Edit Server
Access using Preconfigured manually starting 360
Toolbar Icon 107 manually stopping 359
Review and Edit Window 102 stopping and starting 358
Review and Edit window Severity tab of Request window 168
understanding 102 Severity, resetting 205
Review status Species Code
definition of 124 setting up 323
Right-select menus 30 Specific 54
Starting the server 358, 360
S
Status
Sample 102
defined 124
browsing all 51
sample status 50
details 69
finding a single sample 69 Stopping the server 358, 359
finding more information 66 System management functions
generating a report 86 about 16
navigating through list of 52 System managers, setting up 341
query 54 T
selecting alternate data 54
Table access
status overview 70
controlling 347
using the context menu 67

411
 Table data U
protecting 347 Unit
Tasks dimensions for 266
scheduling 378 setting 263
Test Unit editor, using 264
configuring 243 units of measure
merging into workorder 235 defined 92
viewing test list and test details identical definition 248
243 LIS, software, instrument 92
Test and instrument parameters Upload results 136
specifying for a QC Lot 176 Uploaded status, defined 124
Test aspects, defining 276 User interface languages 391
Test code User-defined languages 391
setting up 320
Users
Test request information adding to a privilege 345
viewing 164 setting up 335
Test, configuring
adding test to list 243 V
creating panels 276 Validated results
deleting test from list 262 uploading 136
editing a test definition 262 Validated status
setting delta norms 272 changing 150
setting morphology flags 268 definition 124
setting norms 269 W
setting result choices 267
Watchdog
setting units 263
alerts 361
using the test editor 245
registering 370
Tips for using the ADVIA CentraLink starting and stopping 371
system 39
Westgard Rules
Toolbar configuring for instrument 315
adding buttons 399 configuring for method 318
using the function toolbar 24 configuring for test 317
ToolTips, using 25 Windows
Troubleshooting 402 browsers and editors 27
Type error 117

412 ADVIA CentraLink Operator’s Guide

 Index

Workorder merging 235

manually entering 231

413